·No text on this page.

·Bo7 sumin
THE
PRÅKRITA-LAKSHANAM
OB
CHANDA'S GRAMMAR
.
OF THE
ANCIENT (ÁRSHA) PRÁ KRI]
EDITED BY
A. F. RUDOLF HOERNLE,
PH, D. TÜBINGEN,
FELLOW OF THE CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY, HONORARY
PHILOLOGICAL SECRETARY TO THE ASIATIC
SOCIETY OF BENGAL, ETC.
Part I.
--
TEXT WITH A CRITICAL INTRODUCTION AND INDEXES.
SOCIE)
ATIC
LIBRARY
BENGAL
CALCUTTA:
PRINTED BY J. W. THOMAS, BAPTIST KISSION PRESS,
PUBLISHED BY THE ASIATIC SOODSTI,
57, PARK STREET.
1880.
1

·B1 88
Pt. 1
SL no.
19409
16063

·TO
SIR WILLIAM MUIR, K. C. S. I.
ETC., ETO.
WHO HAS DONE SO MUCH FOR THE
STUDY OF THE LANGUAGES
OF INDIA
THIS WORK
IS. DEDICATED
AS A TOKEN OF SINCERE RESPECT AND GRATITUDE.

·No text on this page.

·PREFACE. In the Introductory remarks, I shall fully explain the reasons of the arrangement observed in the following edition. In the main portion of it, I have adopted the text of the MSS. A and B, giving as a rule, in case of a differenco, the preference to the reading of A. All the additional matter in the text of the MSS. C and D, as well as what is peculiar to any one or several MSS., has been distributed in the Appendices. This arrangement, I am awaro, has its drawbacks; but on the whole I have thought it the best possible in the peculiar circumstances of the caso. The footnotes immediately under the text contain extracts from the marginal gloss of MS. C, as also the few marginal remarks that occur in MS. B. Below these again are given, at the foot of each page, the various readings of the four MSS. Undoubted clerical mors have been mitted. With the exception of those, every difference has been noted ; in doubtful cases, I bave even admitted what to me seemed a mere clerical error. Considering the important character of Chanda's work and the stato of the materials at my command, it seemed to me particularly desirable to place the reader in po8808 sion of the fullest information to form his own judgment on points that may be disputable. The two indexes of sútras and Prákrit words which have been added to this edition need no defence or explanation. The value of these aids has boon long since recognized. The whole work is contemplated to consist of two parts. The second part, containing an English translation and annotations, is nearly ready for the press and will shortly appear. There only remains to me the pleasing duty of acknowledging the kindness of Dr. Rajendra Lála Mitra Rai Babádur and Pandit Ráma Mişra Şástrí in so readily placing at my service their MSS. of Chaņờa's Grammar, and the liberality of the Asiatic Society of Bengal in providing the necessary funds for the publication of this work. A. F. R.-H. Calcutta, October 1880.

·No text on this page.

·CONTENTS. PAGE ................. ......... ............. xxiv ............. ........................ lv ............. 1x ........ ... lxiii ...................... ........... INTRODUCTION Sketch of Chanda's Grammar Analysis of the Sútras on Nominal Doclension On the change of dental n to cerebral » On the treatment of single medial consonants TEXT Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix BC Appendix CD Appendix B C D INDEX .................... ............ ........... ... ............. ............. ................ Sútras.... Prákrit Words ......... CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA ..... ............ ..............

·No text on this page.

·INTRODUCTION. The Prákrit Grammar the text of which is given in the following pages professes to be the work of Chanda. About his person and tho timo when he lived nothing, so far as I am aware, is known beyond what can be gathered from the work itself. From the mention of Víra or Mahávíra, the great apostlo of the Jain religion, in the introductory verse, and from the fact that the Granmar treats of an ancient form of what is now commonly called the Jaiua Prákrit, it may perhaps be permissible to conclude that he belonged to the Jain cominunity.* That he must have lived in very carly times, probably not later than the beginning of our era, would appear from tho arch. ic character of the language which he describes; assuming, of course, that he was contemporary with that language. The Grammar bears the name of Prákrita-Lakshaņa. It is a curious cir. cumstance, that a grammar, bearing the samo name, is ascribed by two old writers, Kedára Bhatta and Malayagiri, to l'aņini, the famous Sanskrit Grammarian. The remark of the former, as quoted by d'Alwis in his Introduction to Kachchayana's Gramınar (p. xxv), is the following: piiņinibhugavín prákritalakshanam api vakti samskritád anyat, " dirgháksharam cha kútrachich ekim mátrám upaiti" iti; i. e., " the blessed Páņini also enunciates a Prákrit rule, different from Sanskrit, viz., that a long vowel becomes short.”+ Com. pare with this Chanda's rule in sútra II, 3. The passage, howevor, does not necessarily imply that Páņini was the author of a Prákrit grammar of that name. The language of Malayagiri, as quoted by Weber, in bis Indische Studien, 1. X, p. 277, and Indische Streifen, vol. II, p. 325, is much more explicit. It occurs in his commentary to the well-known Jaina work, the Súryaprajñápti, 12 * It is not tippossible, however, that the introductory verse is to be ascribed to the Revisionists, to whom most of the other Jaina indications are due ; 6.9., the invocation of the Siddhas at the beginning of the work, and the same in sútra 1, 6. The mero fact of Chaņda treating of an old formats Prákrit, which was afterwards modified by the Jainas, does not necessarily prove any connection of Chanda with the latter. † Soo also Pischel Dissertatio inauguralis, p. 4. According to ber, Indische Streifen II, p. 825, there appears to be some doubt as to the authenticity quotation.

·ji INTRODUCTION. : and is as follows : " chattári" iti cha sútre napurnsakatvanirdeşaḥ prákritatvát ; praksite hi lingam vyabhichári, yad áha páxinih saprákytalakshane, " lingam "vyabhicháry api" iti ; i. e., “ as to the form chattári' occurring in the sútra, the use of the neuter is accountable by its being Prákrit; for in Prakrit the gender is changeable, as Páņini has said in bis (work called) Prákritalakshaņa : 'the gender is changeable also.'” Compare with this Chanda's rule in sútra I, 4. If our Prákṣitalakshana is the work referred to by those.' two writers, neither of their references are strictly quotations. The passage of Kedára Bbetta, indeed, I do not think, exactly professes to give a quotation, but rather a paraphrase of the rule which was in his mind. Malayagiri's language certainly seems to imply that he quotes a rule. Among all Prákrit grammars, known at present, there is none which contains such a rule. The nearest approach to it is the rule in Hemachandra IV, 115 and Trivikrama III, 4, 69, lingam atantram, with its commentary: apabhramse lingam atantram ryabhichári prúyo bhavati. It seems very probable, that Malayagiri misquotes lemachandra's rule and somehow or other confuses the Prákrita- Lakshana with Homachandra's work. It may be observed, that to quote the exact rule of the Prákritalakshaņa, kvachid vyatyayaḥ, would hardly have suited him, as without an explanation it would not have been intelligible, whereas Hemachandra's rule is so. A confusion of Chanda's and Hemachandra's works will perhaps not appear so unnatural, when it is remembered (as I shall show in the sequel), that in all probability Chanda's work was, as it were, the framo round which Hemachandra built up his own work. It should also be noted, that while Hemachandra's rule is limited to the Apabhramşa, Malayagiri understands his rule to apply to Prákrit generally. Now Chanda's rule does apply to Prákrit generally. The fact, that both Kedára Bbațța and Malayagiri ascribe the Prákrita-Lakshana to Púņini, is, of course, of no weight. It merely shows that they had only a traditional acquaintance with the work. Still its traditional ascription to Páņini is in so far important, as it shows that The grammar was considered to be ancient and authoritative. This character well agrees with Chanda's Prákritalakshaņa. There is another curious circumstance in Malayagiri's Commentary, which I may mention here, as it seems to bear on the question under notice. Weber (in his Indische Studien, vol. X, p. 278) quotes another remark of that writer: bahuvachanam prúksitatvád, uktam oha " bahuvayane Cyanena ?) duvayaņam” iti ; i. e" (the use of) the plural is (accountable) by Prákrit usage, for it is said that the dual .(is to be expressed) by the plural.'” Compare with this Chanda's rule in sútra II, 12, with its commentary.* But the curious fact is that in the marginal Hemachandra a similar rule in III, 130, but his grammatical terminology different (dvivachanasya bahuruchanam) and seems to have been taken form Varamuchi :.VI, 63.

·INTRODUCTION. gloss of MS. C, specimens of which are appended to the text in this edition, that sátra of Chanda is always quoted in nearly the same Prákrit transliteration as in Malayagiri, though all other sútras aro cited by the gloss in their Sanskrit form. See, 6. 9., the footnoto to sakkisáná in II, 1., and the footnote to dvitvam in II, 12. I suppose it can hardly be doubtful, but that the writer of the marginal gloss really meant Chanda's sútra by his Prákrit quotation; and if so, the samo Prákrit quotation in Malayagiri must refer to the same sútra (of Chanda). Perhaps the fact shows that Cbayda's Gramwar was originally written in Prákrit, and in later times translatod iuto Sanskrit, as it has happened to so many other Jaina Prákrit works ; but that a few of his sútras traditionally maintained themselves in their old Prákrit form, and were preferentially quoted in that form. Still after all has been said, the evidence remains of a vory slender kind. Perhaps all that can be safely asserted is, that it is not impossible, that those two writers wero speaking of Chanda's Prákrita Lakshana. In preparing the following cdition I havo bad the assistance of four MSS. which I have distinguished as A, B, C and D respectively. MSS. A and B are the property of Dr. Rájendralála Mitra of Caloutta, who very kindly placed thein at my service. Th 'y aro mentioned by Dr. Mitra on xix, of the Appendix to Vol. III, Part II, No. IX, of his Notices of Sanskrit MSS. (Calcutta, 1875). They were by him supposed to bo only one MS.; but on coming into my hands, I was vory agreeably surprised to discover that they really were two distinct and (as a glance at the variae lectiones and appendices will at once show) independent MSS. of the same work. Both are quite modern copies (bearing date 1875, Samvat 1931). Of the originals, I regret, I have not been able to obtain a sight. Dr. Mitra informs mo that they were in the possession of a Panțit in Lucknow, who has since died; but that he has not seen then himself. It would have been of great importance to have been able to consult the originals. The copies are clearly writton, but they abound in errors. Some of these are mero clerical errors which offor no difficulty ; others again appear to be merely the peculiarities of Jain ortho. graphy, somewhat exaggerated by being translated into the ordinary Nágarí characters of the North West Provinces. I shall explain these peculiarities further on. Both MSS. A and B are complete, written on paper and consisting of nine small oblong leaves, with nine lines to the page. MS. C is a very excellent MS., beautifully, carefully and almost faultlase. ly written. It is on paper and consists of thirteen leaves, with nine lines to the page. It was lent to me by my friend, Pandit Rárna Misra Şástrí, Assig. tant Professor of Philosophy in the Sanskrit College at Benares. It belong to one of his students, a Jain by religion, and a native of Kodáyá in Kachchh (W. India). It was copied by the latter for his own use, which accounts for its ·IV INTRODUCTION. > excellent execution. It is said to have been copied from a very old MS., 400 years old; with how mucb of truth, I am unable to say, my efforts to obtain it being baffled by the usual plea of its owner having died. The MS. is complete ; and has the peculiarity of being supplied with a very copious marginal gloss, written in very close lines and extremely small letters on the margin and, bere and there, between the lines of the text. This gloss, however, only extends as far as the 27th sútra of the IInd chapter. Whether this is • owing to the original MS. having had no more of it, or the student, who copied it, failing to complete bis transcript, does not appear. * The marginal gloss is chiefly of use inasmuch as it supplies Sanskrit translations of all Prákrit examples and quotations ; it also well illustrates tbommander of the native grammarians in applying grammatical rules to the explanations of word-forms. For these reasons I bave added a few ext' pts from it in the footnotes, appended to the text and preceding the critical a) ratus. The MS. C bears no dato; but, of course, it must be of quite modern origin. MS. D belongs to myself. It was given to me by my friend Pandit Ráma Miara, the same gentleman who procured for me MS. C. It is a very fair MS., though not so good as C. It is clearly and carefully written; but it is not without mistakes, which, however, being obvious clerical errors, are of no account and, therefore, have generally not been noticed in the critical footnotes. It is on paper and consists of nineteen leaves, with six lines to every page. It is a quite modern copy, of 1876, which Panạit Ráma Mişra caused to be prepared for ine from an old MS. in the possession of a Panțit, resident in some village in the State of Alwar. This original MS. also I have been unable to procure, on account of the death in the meantime of its owner! The orthography of all the four MSS. exhibits the peculiarities of what has been called the Jaina Prákrit. MS. C is written in the Jaina The very curious error, notod on p. 13 (faufa) made me at first inclined to look upon the gloss as a more modern addition, possibly made by the student himself. But tho fact, that ono of its remarks with referenco to sútra I, 13 occurs as part of the text in Ms. D, rendors this improbable. In any caso, tho anthor of it cannot have boen a very learned pandit; though for that matter, the author of the text itself, as containod in C, does not show very favoarably. Soe, e. 9., tho clumsy way in which sútra CD I, 6a is drawn. + Thus गुरुणं for गुरूर्ण, गिरिएं for गिरोणं, I, 5 ; Sanskrit जेषां for येषां in I, 3, eto. 1 They rather seem to be the peculiarities of the Western Indian style of writing generally. I have noticed them in other than Jain writings; e. g., in the MSS. of the Prithiraja Rasau. Most Jaina writings are from Western India. On Jaina Prátrit orthography, see Webor Bhagarati, pp. 383-392, E. Müller, Beitruge zur Grammatik des Faina Pokrit, pp: 11, 29, 80, Jacobi, Kalota Sútra, pp. 17-21, Klatt, Dhanapala's Rishabha ·INTRODUCTION. vii vad Prákrit style ; MS. D also, but not so uniformity. MSS. A and Bihch and written in the ordinary Nágari of Eastern Hindústán, but they show any B TW takeable traces of having been copied from originals written in the Jainanal use western style. These orthographic peculiarities (see Plate) may be divilor grant into two classes, graphic and phonetic. To the former belong 1. The symbol No. 1 (in the Plate) for o. In MS. C this is alwall has carefully distinguished from v W. MS. D in a few cases confuses thom But in A and B they are not only perpetually confused, but sometimes ove In (ú) pr & (ur) is written ; thus showing that the copyists had no notion the meaning of that Jaina symbol. tho 2. In MS. C u in conjunction with certain consonants has a peculias 1); shape. See Nos. 2–7. 3. The two symbols Nos. 8 or I for jh and No. 10 for d are always caro-7), fully distinguished in C; but are much confounded in D. The ordinary Náguri symbol 3 d, however, is also occasionally used in D; in C it is the usual one. s. 4. The substistute for @, so common in modern writing, never occurs in C and D. In B it is found once; viz., III, 15 v4: for .. On the other band, MS. A has once the very unusual substitute for ; viz. III, 14 पाखाण for पाषाण. 5. The use of the symbols 7 and 7 v is very uncertain. Thus C has in juxtaposition besun and vesu (1, 3), behim and vehi (1, 1), bakú (1, 3) and vahúe (1, 9). MS. D has ribú and rivum (1, 3), gáví and gábí (II, 10), &c. On the whole C follows the Sanskrit use, while D prefers v. MSS. A and B are 110 less uncertain ; thus A has vuddhi and buddhiu (I, 10), gibic and gávihim (II, 16); B has behinto (1, 13), and vehim (I, 7), &c. On the wholo B prefers v.t As it was necessary to observe some system, I have followed MS. C in being guided by Sanskrit usage. 6. There is also much uncertainty in the use of the symbols o 8 and a $ ; though more so in A and B, than C and D. In C the confusion occurs rarely; e. 9., silam (I, 30), and commonly Sanskrit súra. In D it is.much more frequent;.e. g., saşi for şasi (I, 22); $masúnam for smaşánam, sirohybo for súrshaḥ. &c. In A and B it is very common; thus in A and B, şese, hamsa pasuta for şeşe, hamse, paşutta, (IV, 39) ; in A tişunham for tisanham (1, 6). The substitution of for $ is much more cominon than the reverse. 7. The symbols Nos. 11 or 12 for kkh often occur in D. In A add B ; Panchápiks in J. G. O. 8., vol. XXXIII, pp. 447, 448, also Stevenson, Kalpa Sútra, pp. 137–143. Once D writes TT for o. + Curiously enough, whon B has b, noes it wrongly in Sanskrit words ; 6.9i, bayamu for payam (I, 3), beti kim (III 7), barga (IUI, 17), barna (III, 25).

·INTRODUCTION. symbols are Nos. 13 and 14.* Calways has the usual Nagarí symbol , oh also occurs twice in A. In a few cases A B D write simply ; C never. 8. The symbol o for 99 very common in the marginal gloss, though i in the text, of C. Once or twice it occurs in D. Otherwise the ordinary igari form is used. In the originals of A and B, however, it must have en almost universal. The copyists evidently did not know it ; for they comonly write it as u gn or jo gj, see Nos. 15 and 16. Only once does A give be correct transcription , in aggissa (I, 13). 9. The symbols, No. 17 for chchh and No. 18 for tth, are generally distin. guished in C; there are only two exceptions, viz., echchhu for etthu (I, 11) and pattham for pachchham (III, 26). D uses the ordinary Nágarí symbol for both chchh and tth; thus pachchham= Skr. pathyam and pachchho for puttho - Skr. párthaḥ in III, 26. A and B transcribe them correctly by the ordinary Nágari uchchh and matth; though the commonly write merely chh in the place of chchh. On the other hand C and D commonly write No. 17 and respectively in the place of chh. 10: The symbol of jj is No. 20 or 21, correctly transcribed in A and B by the 11. The symbols Nos. 22–26 or Nos. 27 and 28 for jjh are used in C and D. The copyists of A and B, not understanding the former, variously transcribe it by Nos. 294-36. 12. The symbol g for fth is commonly used by A, B, D ; rarely 8 or 7. C has always . Similarly the symbols z or for adh are commonly used by all four MSS. I may here add the general remark, that conjuncts consisting of the unaspirate and aspirate of the same class, are treated with great laxity, as regards writing them ; though, doubtlessly, they were always pronounced correctly (according to the rules Ch. 1II, 26. Vr. III, 51. H. C. II, 90). Thus hard aspirate conjuncts might be written in three ways: either the aspirate alone, or the aspirate donbled, or (the correct form) the aspirate preceded by its unaspirate. A sonant aspirate conjunct might even be written in four ways : either the aspirate alone, or the aspirate doubled, or the aspirate preceded by the hard unaspirate, or (the correct form) the aspirate preceded by its sonant unaspirate. Examples of nearly each of these varieties may be found in the four MSS. of Chanda. I bave met with every one of them in the MSS. of the Prithiraj Rasau. Thus the symbol No. 37 is strictly pok, while Nos. 88 or 39 are bbh. Similarly Nos. 13 and 14 (in the Prithiráj *) are strictly khkh, while Nos. 11 and 12 are kkh. 18. The symbols 8,4, 9,9, are often confounded in A and B, showing that the copyists were imperfectly acquainted with the orthography of the The former are to be doen in Weber's Bhagavati, Plato I, linos 6 and 8 (dukkhamam). The latter word in MS. W of the Prákrita Prakása, as noted by Cowell, p. 90, (sutra 20).

·INTRODUCTION. vii . of. or $ . originals. It may be observed that, as a rule, dh is a mistake for chch and gk for tov; thus the former occurs in Asfire (II, 17) for ofery, BET (III, 9) 'for $19; the latter in B gåa: (III, 9) for war. The occasional use for z is peculiar to D; e. 9., ami for (III, 2), gi for grante (C D III, 15a). 14. · The syinbol No. 39 is used by C for 6th and mbh. MS. D has No. 38; and A B have Nos. 29, 40 and 41. 15. The mis-spelled symbol ohm occurs very frequently in B and D. In A it is very rare ; in C it never occurs. 16. The symbol or is very commonly written in A and B, in the place of an anusvára, at the end of a phrase or sentenco (see footnote to I, 1); never in C and D. In A the class nasal is not unfrequently written instead of the usual anusvára, in conjuncts; e. 9., lingañcha (1, 2), hincha (1, 17), tumandevo (1, 19), kinte (I, 23), jalanti (I, 12), vambhand (II, 12), &c. The phonetic peculiarities of the Jain Prákrit observable in the MSS. are two: 1. The presence of the dental 7 n. In MSS. A and B, 7, whether single or conjunct, is always used when standing at the beginning of a word, and almost always when in the iniddle of a word. In MSS. C und 1), * is every where changed to u, in accordance with the coninoner Prákrit usago (sce Vr. II, 42). This is rather il strange circumstance, seeing that the two MSS. C and 1 otherwise oxhibit, in many ways, a more distinctly Jain character than A and B; compare, c. 9., their introductory salutation, and their additions in sútra I, 5.* 2. The so-called ya-sruti, i. e., the insertion of an euphonic oy betweon two vowels, the latter of which must be a, while the preceding may bo any This rule, however, is not uniformly observed in the MSS. The text presented in these four MSS. differs very groatly. Tho most obvious difference is in extent, as will be seen at once from the rolative sizo of the MSS. and from the list of sútras appended to this edition. The MSS. may be divided into two classes. The text of A and B is substantially the sumo, 80 is that of C and D; but while the former MSS. contain 99 sútras divided into three chapters, the latter extend to 126 and 128 sútras distributed into four chapters. The owner of A and B, who however had not examined his MSS., expressed a suspicion that they were fragmentary.t On first receiving them, I was myself inclined to think, that they contained a mutilated text. But further examination soon showed me, not only that A and B contained & complete, but that, in fact, they contained an older and a more original * For a possible reason of this circumstanco, seo below p. xxiv. † Sce Proceedings, Asiatic Society of Bengal, November 1878. one.

·vili INTRODUCTION. text than C and D; that of the latter two MSS. being a much later, rearranged and enlarged, recension of the text of A and B. I shall bere describe some of the most striking points of evidence : others will be noticed in the foot. notes to the English translation. In the first place, as to the originality of the text of A and B. The order of the Sútras I, 19, 20, 21 in A and B is consistent, while their order I, 19, 21, 20 in Cand D is inconsistent and necessitates an unusual interpretation of the term cha "also" in sútra. I, 20. The word cha“ also", used as a grammatical technical term, has a well-known and well-defined meaning. It always refers to the preceding rule and implies that what is mentioned there is also applicable to the rule in which cha occurs. Thus in MS. A and B, sútra I, 19 # starost is followed by I, 20 urge. The termy in the latter indicates, that the form gå mentioned in the former is also to bo understood in the latter. The Revisionists, however, in order to dispose of all sútras referring to the nominative case before those relating to the accusative, change the order of the sútras, placing them thus : I, 19. g# pfawmit, 1, 21 grufe, I, 20 f# gi a. But when the sútras are thus placed, the term would imply that go of the preceding sútra is also to be understood in the last sútra. As this result would be manifestly wrong, the Rovisionists actually insert into the last sútra the forms, which ought to be indicated by a us understood, and, therefore, alter the sútra to eff ge ga n 7 (see App. CD, p. 41), so that here does not refer to a preceding sútra but to a part of the sútra itself in which it occurs ! There could bardly be a clearer piece of evidence as to which of the two texts is the original. Again the omission of the sútra III, 10 in C and D disturbs the originally consistent plan on which the third chapter is drawn in A and B, and consequently necessitates in C and D a very inconsistent use of the sibilant 8 8. in the sútras of that chapter. According to the plan of A and B in that chapter, Sanskrit conjunct consonants are treated of in the first nine sútras (III, 1-9); the remaining sútras (III, 11-39) are devoted to the treatment of single consonants; the intermediate sútra (III, 10) is intended to indicate this division. * In the first part (II1, 1-9), all conjuncts are reduced to single consonants, by eliding, in some way or other, all consonants of the conjunot save one. Having thus simplified the problem, so as to have none but single consonants (whether original or resultant) to deal with, Chanda next proceeds in the second part (III, 11–39) to enumerate the manifold changes ; No other division of tho consonants, so far as these sútras are concerned, is recognised; it makes no difference, whether the conjunct or single consonant is modial or initial; or whether the single consonant is one which was origihally single or has only become so as tho result of tho simplification of a conjunct consonant. 11 ·INTRODUCTION. ix is, दम् that the single consonants (no matter, whether original or resultant) may undergo. Now in the second part Chanţa rules that every singlo u ş or 88% changes to # in Prákrit .(III, 18); so that as regards single consonants, 8.& represents the whole sibilant class. Hence whenever else, in the second part, Chanda has to speak of the sibilant class, he simply indicatos it by the use of स. Thus we have sútra III, 14 ATTRI UPVT, illustrated by दह ; again sutra III, 39 मागविकायां रसयोर् लभौ, illustrated by शेषः H. Hero a 8 and 8h are indicated by F 8, because by sútra III, 18 they are no more at ș and sh, but have been alrcady changed to ge; that ánd î9: = 79= TÀ.* This proceduro, of course, could not be applied to the first part (III, 1-9) which treats of conjunots and which is not affected by sútra III, 18. In that part, # 8 cannot represent the whole sibilant class ; for there the three Sanskrit sibilants, as such, becomo the subjects of change. In tho first part, therefore, either all three sibilants must be enumerated soverally whenever tho sibilant class is spokon of, or somo other short sign for them must be alopted. Chandit clectod the latter course, and the sign he selected appears to have been tho sibilant *$; most probably on account of its being the first in the sibilant series (W, 9, 0). 'Thus in stitra III, 2 शवलभ्यो व्यंजनं, v represents म in वर्ग सम्गं, and y in श्रोतव्यं = सोतवं. That is, a v and T r are respectively elided after : and * : ; next # 8 and us, having now becomo single consonants, pass into the second part, where * s at once comes under the oporation of rulo III, 18 and turns into 8; while 88, of courso, remains unchanged.t I tuink it will be admitted that in this arrangement Chanda follows & simple and consistent method. Now what do the Revisionists of Cand D do ? They omit sútra III, 10, thereby abolishing the division of the two parts; and they do this for the purpose, evidently, of making nútra 1II, 18 applicable to the whole third chapter, and dispensing with the double sigu of a s and # 8. Consequently they uso y 8 throughout the chapter to indicate the whole sibilant class, because according to their intention the sibilants a ş and a sh practically do not exist, having at once changed to 8 8. * It will bo observed, that the intermediate steps and ਬਥੋਂ aro here introduced hy a silont reference to sútra III, 18. Such "silent references" occur in all Prákrit Grammarians. As an instance from Hlemachandra, I may mention his sútru I, 250, whero he rules that the v of svapna becomes in; but in reality tho svapna, haviug become o by silent reference to sútra 1, 231, bocomus m. That tho of svupna is reforred to in I, 259, may be seen by comparing tho sútrus I, 46 and II, 108. + The whole sibilant class is also ken of in sútra III, 23, but though that sútra is in the second part, the sibilants are referred to thore, not as single consonants, but us parts of a conjunct. Horice, nuturally, thu sibilant used to indicute them is not y P of not the P, 0, ܕ8 but ·INTRODUCTION. Thus C D read guitar and in sútra III, 2 and illustrate it by the example श्रोत- सोमवं; that is, they make 88 to indicate # $, because, according to them, imate changes, by silent reference to rule III, 18, into warmi; whereupon Er is elided by rule III, 2. This process, no doubt, simplifies the original method, by substituting one sign for the sibilant class in the place of two; but it does so at the expense of all symmetry and consistency of the original plan; for with the exception of those two sútras III, 10 and III, 18, all others are still treated as if the original plan of the division into two parts, referring to conjuncts and singles respectively, were still in force. This inconsistency becomes especially glaring in the case of sútra III, 8 077 T:, which, on the revisionist principle, ought to have been changed to 817 zi. For just as in the previous case srazi becomes, by silent reference to rulo III, 18, 172, so here er becomes by the same rule z ; next 88 would be elided. So that, consistently, a & should here have been written to represent sh. On the other hand, on the original plan, the spelling of sútra 977 7: is correct; it could not have been spelled #7 E:, because the sibilant a sh is the only (conjunct) sibilant to which the rule applies. Briefly, the matter as between Chanļa and his Revisionists stands thus: Chanda uses * to denote the whole sibilant class, whenever the rule is applicable to all the sibilants severally; bence when the rule applies to only one member of the sibilant class, he cannot use # 8, but must use that member itself. On the other hand, he uses 8 to denote the whole sibilant class, whenever ex hypothesi (that is, by silent reference to rulo III, 18) no longer any other sibilant, but 8 8, is supposed to exist. This terminology, however, presupposes and necessitates the division of the chapter into two parts, which I have already explained. The Revisionists abolish the division and accept only the latter half of Chanda's terminology. But then, in consistency, they are precluded from using any other sibilant (than e) as an indicatory in any sútra ; for, ex hypothesi, no longer any other sibilant, but # s, is supposed to exist. The matter is complicated; but I trust I have sucoeeded in making it sufficiently clear. Perhaps a complete understanding of the point at issue will not be attainable, unless by .prac. tically working through the examples, as I have done, by the light of either of the rival theories. Unfortunately the matter is further complicated by, the uncertainty of the spelling in the MSS. A and B. How little reliance can be placed on their spolling may be seen from the fact, that MS. B spells et for at in sútra III, 39. I must reserve the discussion of this subordinate point, however, for the footnotes to the translation. In the text, I have restored H & in all sútras, in which the original plan of Chaņda requires it; i. e., in III, 2. 4. 6. 23.* • The only two Prákrit Grammariann, who, to my knowledge, use a sanjad or sign for the sibilant olaas are Trivikrama and Şubhachandra. The former uses ** (T. V. X ·INTRODUCTION. xi Next, as to the relative age of the texts of the two sets of MSS., the wording of sútra III, 34 in MSS. A and B indicates & much more ancient phase of the Prákrit language, than the wording of the same sútra in MSS. Cand D; and this circumstance is confirmed by sútras III, 11, 12, which are consistent with the wording of the sútra III, 34 in A and B, but not with that in C and D. It is further confirmed by the omission in A and B of all reference to the (so-called) Saurasoní dialect, that is, by the omission of sútra III, 39a which refers to one of the most incisive differences between that dialect and the so-called) Máháráshtrí ; a difference which, at tho poriod of the formulation of the rules as they are in the text of A B, evidently did not yet exist, while it was fully developed at the time when the text of C D was settled. A comparison of sútra III, 34 with III, 12 and of III, 13 with III, 11 shows that at that period when the tost dolivered in A B was written, hard medial single unaspirate consonants were not elidod, nor hard medial single aspirates reduced to h (with the excoption of a k and kh), though occasionally the former were changed into the correspond. ing soft consonants. On the other hand a comparison of those sútras, as they stand in A B, with the samo sutras, as C D have them, shows that at the period, when the text contained C D was writton, all unaspirate consonants (exc. and 3 t), whether surd or sonant, were elided, while all aspirate consonants, whether surd or sonant (exc. palatals and cerebrals) were reduced to ph. I shall have to recur to this important point prosently. With the exception of the omission in D of the sútras II, la, 16, 1o, the texts of C and D are nearly identical. There is a much greater difference between the texts of A and B. The latter (MS. B) contains some additional matter, one part of which is peculiar to B, while the other it has in common with C and D. On the other hand, A has nothing in cominon with C D, which does not also occur in B. Though, therefore, the texts of A and B are sub. stantially the same, yet B occupies a slightly interniediate position between A on the one hand, and C D on the other. The general result, thus, is that the original grammar of Chaņda presents a very old phase of the Prákrit language, and that the MS. A contains that grammar in its oldest and most genuine form ; but that this grimmar has undergone at various periods, more (in CD) or less (in B) thorougbugoing revisions. ly 1, 1, 7.) ; the latter has fx ($. C. 1, 1. 7). Chanda's sanjñá ya is perhaps somow.ict, anomalous ; for with Sanskrit Grammarians it is usuul to add u or varga to a consomadły in order to form a sanjñá (6. 9., for at for the guttural class). This may höptional fact; of the reasons for the alteration of the Revisionists. But it is possible that may really have been or fu; in sútra III, 4, MS. B reada t, which a is given as to for it (wit); and it would be the locative of D or fü; sed the footacjubstituto current of sátra III, 4. 17.

·INTRODUCTION. ; If that had been all, there would not have been much reason for complaint. Unfortunately, the Revisionists have not been content with merely revising or rather recasting and enlarging Chanda's grammar; but while leaving the framework, as it were, of the rules of Chanda untouched, they have attempted to adjust his grammar to a later phase of the language, by altering the spelling of the Prákrit words and forms, occurring in it, so as to bring them in agreement with that later phase. The result in some cases is very ludicrous. Thus according to Chanda's rule III, 11 y th changes to dh; by way of illustration the Revisionists make aren: náthaḥ to change into ani náho. Again according to the rule III, 34 ech, a t, 9 p are not elided ; by way of illustration we have an suí for pfo: şuchiḥ, arhit váo for a7a: vataḥ, por neuram for at núpuram, in direct defiance of rule III, 12. The ignoring of those three rulos, indeed, has been consistently carried out throughout the grammar. * It was impossible to print the text together with all these inconsistencies; and it became necessary to restore the original text, as far as it could be done with safety. In reference to some of the most important cases of restoration, I shall now explain the reasons that have guided me. In the case of others of minor importance my reasons for preferring a particular spelling will be found in the footnotes to the English translation. One important case of restoration regarding the sibilants bas been already explained (see pp. IX, X). With regard to these restorations, though I conceive that they could not be avoided in a scientific edition of the text and though I have given, of course, what after mature consideration of all relevant circumstances, appeared to me to have the greatest probability, I can well foresce, and there is undoubtedly room for, dif. ference of opinion. But considering the difficulties of the case, perhaps I may venture to hopo an indulgent consideration of the results such as they are. A more generally satisfactory settlement of the text must wait for more and better MSS., especially of the older text, or for a more competent editor than myself.t • Another instanco is sútra II, 10, according to which the nominative singular of in 1 bases should ond with a short i; but one of the examples given is buddht for buddhi. 01 Similarly according to sútras 1, 3 and I, 7 the instrumental plural in Prákrit has the thesame form as in Sanskrit, with the exception of Sansk. bhis becoming Prák. hi ; the samples, however, aro agyihi, mahúhi for aggihi, mnahubi Skr. agnibhiḥ, madhubhiḥ. pretp thu furthor remarks in the Sketch of Chanda's Grammar. + As to the possibility or probability of such revisions of old texts by later hands, point, wunnte Jacobi's romarks in his Introduction to his excellent edition of the Kalpa restored as in "it has been considered as a proof of the priority of Buddhism that Páli i. 6., in 1II, 2. 4.? language than tho Prákrit of the Jainas. The fact is true, but it proves the form of the Jaina sútras was fixed only one thousand years after • The only twoh. It is but reasonablo, that during the preceding millennium the for the sibilant class útras underwent great alterations in consequence of the natural tendency can ·INTRODUCTION. xiii * (1). With regard to my restoration in the text of the surd consonants, my reasons were briefly the following First. There is (as already noticed on p. xi) the direct evidence of súţras III, 11 and 34, which, admitting only the clision of k and reduction, of kh, by implication enjoins the retention of the other surds. Second.The most authentic information that we havo as to the state of the oldest Indian Vernacular, in rock-inscriptions, &c., shows that, as a rule, the surd consonants were retained, while tho sonants might be elided ; precisely what Chanda's rules III, 12, 3+ indicate. Third.-It will be seen from the critical footnotes to the text, that the MSS. A and B in a few cases still retain an original #t. Thus in II, 26 A B read He 91' ll Originally, I think, the example must have stood #FI mal all The copyist, not recognising *** as a Prikrit word, as it was an obsolete form, and mistaking it for an erroneous Sanskrit spelling, turned it into . The Revisionists of C and 1), on the other hand, rccognising the old Prákrit form art, but objecting to it on the score of obsoleteness, changed it into the correct later Prakrit form . This appears much more probable than to assume that the scribo of A and B, finding and (or oven ) in his original, changed it into eat. On this view, it must be admitted that the Revisionists of A and B, while carrying through their modernisation of the spelling of their text, occasionally overlooked a word and left it standing in its old dress. That, however, is nothing to be wondered at. To us it is a cause of congratulation, as it helps restoring the original text. Fourth.--Even as regards the Revisionists of Cand D; it is easier to understand their modernizing, e.g., ma into , than; for though it could not possibly have been later Prákrit, ha might have been so. If they had found or (II, 1) in their original text, they might have left them standing, as the retention of sonant medial consonants in the later Prákrit is not altogether unknown ; but if they found on or ofa, they could not do otherwise but change it into ao and , if they wished to conform thoso words to the spelling of their own day. Fifth.-Chanda's rules merely state facts as facts, without defining the range of their applicability; some of the rules are compulsory, others are not 80; but whether they are or are not so, does not appear on the face of the rule. Thus rule III, 16, although it might appear so at first sight, is undoubtedly not compulsory; it enjoins the change of an to ur; but as a matter of fact, an initial a n never changes to Tĩ, and even a medial on does so only in comparatively exceptional cases. The rule, in fact, states an exceptional fact; but as it is a fact, the fact is duly noticed, though u intimation is given as to of those who handed down the sútras by oral tradition or writing to substituto current idioms for antiquated forms," see also abidem, pp. 19, 20, also pp. 15, 16, 17.

·xiv INTRODUCTION, its frequency, whether it is constant or only occasional.* The case of rule III, 12 is similar; it states several facts, some of which ate exceptional, while others are nearly constant. Thus, in the face of rule III, 34, there can , bo little question, but that the change of ak to ng was a comparatively exceptional occurrence; on the other band the change of a ţ to 3d must bave been comparatively constant. It follows, therefore, that, as to the change of it tod, and of ap to a v, the rule does not necessarily imply invariability. What the amount of its frequency may have been, must be judged from other considerations; and for the reasons given under Nos. 2, 3, 4, it seems to me, that the change must have been a comparatively exceptional one, i. e., as a rule # t and a p were retained. On the other hand, the retention of a k must have been comparatively exceptional; as a rule it was elided or, less frequently, changed to a g. Sixth.-In sútra II, 22 there is an undesigned coincidence which very strikingly proves the truth of my restorations. Among the substitutes of vat “like”, there is also mentioned jahá. Now jahá is clearly the same as the Sanskrit yathá. If at the time of the language of the Grammar, it had been the universal practice to reduce a surd aspirated y th to h, there would have been no conceivable reason for singling out the word jahá for particular notice. But if u th at that time was not subject to change, or at least only to adh, then jahá would at once become an exceptional form requiring particular notice. The Revisionists when remodelling Chanda's grammar and reducing (according to the practice of their day) every th to h, failed to notice the inconsistency of permitting jahá to remain in the sútra. Not so Hemachandra ; be at once saw the inconsistency and, accordingly, when adopting the sútra into his grammar (see II. C. II, 182), omitted jahá.t There is, sútra II, 28, a similar undesigned coincidence, showing that at the time of Chanda the surd unaspirates were not usually subject to elipion. In that sútra it is ruled that the Sauskrit iti “ thus" changes in Prákrit to sya. If it had been usual at that time to elide all surd unaspirates, there would have been no need to say anything more in the sútra than that the * The rule also enjoins the change of the dental consonants into palatal or cerebral, As it occurs in that part of the grammar which applies to single consonants, the rule As it stands would seem to apply to all single dental consonants. As a matter of fact, however, it has a very limited range and chiefly applies to such single dental consonants as had originally formed part of a particular compound. This circumstance is, no doubt, connooted with the peculiar plan on which Chanda's Grammar is drawn, and which has bean briofy noticed on p. VIII and will be fully explained afterwards in the Analysis of his Grammar. † This is one of the indications (of which some more will be noticed afterwards) of the posteriority of Homachandra to Chanda and his Revisionists.

·INTRODUCTION. 9 final i of iti changes to a. Now this is precisely what Hemachandra in bis grammar (see H. C. I, 91) does. In his time, it had long since become usual to elide & medial of t; accordingly, seeing that Chanda's sútra stated moro tban was needed, he reformulated it so as to omit what was superfluous. Chanda's Revisionists, however, were again, more suo, not so wise as Hemechandra, but allowed Chanda's sútra to keep its original wording. It is much to be regretted that the Revisionists did not always act with such inconsistency. But though in a few cases, and those not unimportant ones, it can hardly be doubted but that they did venture to tamper with the sútras, yet happily as a rule they contented themselves with the less objectionable process of only remodelling the commentary. Seventh.---Let it be assumed, for argument's sake, that Chanda spelled his words with the bard unaspirates. In later times, as is known from Vararuchi and Hemachandra, hard dentals (a) were, as a rule, elided, while hard labials (a) were generally softened (). Accordingly one would expect the revision of Chanda, made by the authors of C and D, to conform to the later practice. On examination, it will be found that that is so. I have counted all cases of hard unaspirates in that portion of Chanda which is common to all four MSS. There are altogether 50 instances of the hard denta' (a); among these, C D elide it 47 times, soften it twice and retain it once.t Of the hard labial (a) there aro 10 cases; among these C D elide it only once, in the remaining nino cases they soften it (to a). But further, having thus changed the original spelling, the Revisionists could not help observing that the result was inconsistent with the express rule III, 34 of the grammar they were revising. Henca to allow of their eliding the hard dentals (and the bard unaspirates * These are, strictly speaking, only sútras I, 16, II, 4, 6, whero all four M88. agreo in giving the rovisod reading. In all other revisod sútras, my rustored reading his tho suppht of some, one or more, MSS. ; thus, of B in sútra I, 21 and in III, 23, of A B in I, 19, 20, II, 14, 19, 21, III, 2, 13, 22, 34. + The softenings aro, me in the special sútra III, 11 and rafa in the Mágadhi sútra III, 39. In both cases, the softening is fully accounted for by tho purport of the sútra. The retention is in TTR in sútra I, 23. A retains w in 4 cascs (1, 23, LI, 2, 26. III, 39), and B in 6 cases (T, 23. II, 26. III, 9. 23. 39). Thoso retentions are doubtlessly mere oversights. # The solitary case of elision is het, which I am. inclined to think a very old exceptional case ; perhaps already existing in Chanda's timo. It is howover worth noting, that C spells age in IT, 4 (confirmed by the marginal glose); though it has tot in III, 84. In one case (goufo II, 10) D retains T; 80 also A onco (*9* I, 17); these are probably mere oversights of the Reviser. Similarly A once retains (III, 3), and A B once retain 7 (I, 3 sto). [N. B.-gefa in the Texty p. 16, is a misprint for पुररपि.]

·Xyi INTRODUCTION. . generally) they made the needful change in the terms of that sútra (comparo the terms of sútra III, 34 in the Appendix C D with those of the same sútra in the Text); and, on the other hand, to allow of the softening of the hard labial (a) notwithstanding the revised terms of sútra III, Bit, they further altered the terms of sítra III, 22 (from 70tc are: to quinç 7.) and inserted an altogether new sútra (see Appendix C D, p. 50). Through these changes, the Revisionists again placed themselves in agreement with the sútras. It should be noticed that, with regard to these changes, since they are consistent with one another, both Vararuchi and Hemachandra follow the lead of the Revisionists ; compare H. C. I, 177, 231, and Vr. II, 2, 15. It is different, as regards the treatment of the aspirate hard consonants. Instead of changing the terms of sútra III, 13 in a manner analogous to their change of the terms of sútra III, 34 (that is, inserting the hard aspirates into the former sútra), the Revisionists of C D now take the opposite course of omitting kh in sútra III, 13 and subsuming, it under sútra III, 11. Their theory, namely, is that hard aspirates, having changed to sonant ones by III, 11, may now, by silent reference to III, 13, further chango to h; thus, in the examples of sútra III, 11, they change both a th and ca kh to h. On this theory, of course, the special mention of kh in sútra III, 13 is sửperſuous ; accordingly the Revisionista omit it there. But there can be no doubt that this expedient to re-establish consistency is a clumsy and misleading one. Vararuchi and Hemachandra, therefore, have discarded it; they very naturally have preferred to alter the terms of sútra III, 13, after the analogy of the change of the terms of sútra III, 34, which is a much more simple way of putting themselves in order; compare H. C. I, 187, 236 and Vr. II, 27, 26. (2). Another restoration is the form tumbhe in sútra I, 21. Here C and D read tumhe jasi. That tumhe cannot be the original reading, but probably adopted from I, 3, I shall show in the footnote to the translation of the sútra. The question is, what the original reading may have been. A reads tubbhe and B reads tumbhe; but in sútra I, 22 they have the same reading, respectivoly, A tubbhe and B tumbhe. Chanda cannot possibly have written the same word in both sútras ; that would be contrary to the whole genius of sútraavriting ; if the same word had been intended, there would, undoubtedly have been but one sútra : tubbhe (or tumbhe) jaşşasoủ. In the original grammar, then, there must have been a different word in I, 21 from that in I, 22. Nast, it must be observed that in the MSS. A and B the conjuncts mbh, bbh and jjk are perpetually confused ; the two symbols aa or ** being made to do duty promiscuously for any one of them (see the Plate). Thus B spells form for Once or twice also come and #; these are cloarly only due to careless writing.

·1 INTRODUCTION. xvü for III, 2, format for far III, 1, eram for III, 20; smut for ahme III, 8, ** for As I, 30. There is a simple explanation for this confusion. In the Jaina Prákrit the symbols for those three conjuncts are so nearly alike, that for any one unacquainted or unpractised in rending then it is difficult to distinguish them.* There can be very little doubt, that the MSS. A and B were copied from an original MS. written in the Jain characters, and that the words used in the sútras I, 21 and I, 22 contained those difficult Jain symbols, which being undistinguishable to the transcriber wore ropresented by bim by one and the same Nágarí symbol. Sinco howover the two sútras necessarily require two different words, it is evident that the Jain original must have contained two different symbols. The question is, which were they, from among the three. As to sútra 1, 22 the answer is comparatively easy; it must have contained the symbol for bbh. For that is the symbol which Appears in C and D in sútra I, 22 (and also in I, 3 where the word re-occurs). On this point C and D may be trusted; the former was written by a man of tho Jain religion and is in Jain characters; the latter, though not uniformly in Jain characters, was evidently written by a person well acquainted with the peculiarities of Jain writing; and both C and ) nover confound thu symbol for bbh with those for jjh or mbh. The caso is more complicated as to sútra I, 21. ITere even C and D cannot be directly appealed to, as they have a different reading. Yeun indirectly their reading tumhe declares for tumbhe having been the original one. For it is easier to conceive that tumble has been modified into tumhe than that tujjhe should have long so. Even at the present day mh and mbh constantly interchange in the Indian vernaculars. In Hindi, & g., thémhai “ho supports" may be „variously spelled thámbhai. For these reasons I have adopted the spelling tumbhe in I, 21, and tubbhe in I, 22. 13). For some important restorations in nominal declension, the reader is referred to the remarks on the declension of nouns in i and u, in the Sketch of Chanda's Grammar. The subject of the restorations in Chanda's text naturally leads a step further to the question of the age of himself and the language of which he treats in his grammar. If my arguments regarding what must have been the language of the original Chaņda are correct, it would follow that his Prákrit was very closely allied to what is commonly known as Páli. This will be shown more in detail in the comparative Sketch of Chanda's grammar, Herp it will suffice to point out, that Chanda’s Prákrit represents a somewhat later phonetic stage of the old Indian Vernacuiar than Páli. It agrees • The close resemblance of the symbol for mbh to those for blh and jk is strikingly, shown in sátra III, 2, whore C appears to read sijha and D sibbhá for sinidha.

·xviii INTRODUCTION. with Péli, in retaining, as a rule, the surd consonants, aspirate and unaspirate; but it differs from Páli in eliding, as a rule, the sonant unaspirates and reducing to h the sonant aspirates; the surd gutturals being treated in both languages respectively after the analogy of the sonants. Still, if the .MSS. may be trusted, there is one very striking instance in which Chanda's Prákrit represents an older phonetic stage than even Páli. This is the accusative singular of feminine nouns in á, í and ú, and of the first and second personal pronouns. Here Chanda's Prákrit agrees with Sanskrit in preserving the long vowel (sce I, 3), while Páli as well as the later Prá. krit shorten it; e. g., Skr. and Ch. gañgám, but Pú. and Pr. gangam; Skr. nadim, Ch. naim, but Pú. nadim, Pr. naïm ; Skr. mám "me", Ch. márn, but Pá. mam, Pr. mam. Both Vararuchi and Hemachandra bave special rules to enjoin the shortening in the later Prákrit (see Vr. V, 21. H. C. III, 36); so also Kachchayana for the Páli (sco Kach. II, 1, 33, p. 19), while there is no trace of any such rule in Chanda; a fact which strongly makes for the correctness of the forms given in 1, 3.* It may now be asked, what language this old Prakrit of Chanda may have boen. As the title page of the present edition shows, I incline to identify it with the Arsham of Ileniachandra (H. C. I, 2. IV, 287). By " ársha” IIcmachandra understands the language, spoken (as he says) by the Rishist, or (as he says in IV, 287) the olul langnage. With regard to this Arsha Prákrit Ilemachandra expressly states in his rule I, 3, that it cannot be brought under strict rulesť, and that all its rules are permissive only, not compulsoryg. This exactly agrees with what I have had already occasion to point out (see p. XIII), that Chanda's rules are only permissive ; i. e., they merely state facts without defining their constancy or variability; they may or may not be acted upon according to circumstances which must be ascertained from other sources than the rule itself. Again after giving in IV, 287 tho ordinary Magadbí Prákrit rule, that tho noininative singular of a-bases ends in e, lIemachandra adds the remark, that the old (porúņam) or ársba * Tho rule Kach. II, 1, 33 doos not apply to fom. nouns in á; those are provided for by rulo II, 1, 32. Now Chanquºs sútra II, 1 corrosponds to Kach. II, 1, 32, and it might be supposed that Ch. II, I would similarly necossitate the shortoning of á. That was evidently the opinion of the Rovisionists of CD, who write gañgain and tam, but ņain. But it is very improbablo that in Chanda's Prakrit t should havo remained long, while á was shortoned. Either all thrco (á, é, ú) were shortenod or none was shortened. Now that t and á were not shortened, is admitted even by the Rovisionists. Tho fact is, Ch. II, 1 is formulatod so as to allow the very forms gangár, tvám; for these are due to sandhi (ganga +ani, tva + am). Rshiņam idan ársham. IH. O1, 3. drsham prákrutam bahulam bhavati. H. 0.4, 8. ársha hi sarre vilhayo vikalpyante.

·INTRODUCTION. Prákrit, in common with the Arddhamágadhí Prákrit which it follows, agrees with the Mágadhí in regard to the termination of the nominativo singular, but not in any other respect. Then he goes on to quote, as an example of the Arddhamágadhí, the phrase kayare ágachchhaï " which of the two has come.” The porina or ársha form of it would be, kataro ágachchhati. * Now this is the very example, which is given in Chanda's grammar, to illustrate his rulo II, 10, that the nom. sing. may ond in e. It · would thus appear from Hemachandra's statement, thut by the torm úrshr he understands that ancient (poránn) form of the Prákrit language which included what in his day was called the Arddhamágadhi, and which, whilo agreeing with the Mágadhí as regards the termination e of noin. sing., but differing from it with regard to the important changes of r to l and 8 to $ (H. C. 4, 288) and some other minor points peculiar to Mágadhí, was in all other respects identical with the so-called Máháráshtrí. Or to put it in another way: Arddhamágadhi is the samo as Maharashtrí in all respects, except tho nom. sing, in e, which peculiarity it shares with the Magadhí ; on the other hand Mágadhí is identical with Arddhamágndhi in all respects, except the im. portant changes of r to l and s to $ (unitting minor points) which are peculiar the former. If wo now substitute the short namo Kreha in the place of Arddhamágadhi plus Máháráshtrí (of which jointly the Arsha is simply the ancient form), we have an exact statement of the incts us represented in Chanda's Grammar. He speaks of four Prakrits, viz., thio Prákrit, the Mágadhí, the Paíþáchí and the Apabhramşi. Ho omits all mention of the 80-called Múhúráshțrí and Şaurasení ; further his rules on the Irákrit substantially contain everything, commonly ascribed to tho Mábáráslţrí Prákrit, with the addition however of the nom. sing. in e; while he makes his Mágadhi to differ from his Prákrit with regard to the changes of r to l and 8 to $. It thus seems to me very clear, that the Prakrit of Chanda is the úrsha or ancient (porána) form of tho Arddhamágndlí, Mábáráshțri and Saurasení.f • Hemachandra's words are : yad api "poráņam aduhanagahabhásániyayam havač suttam" ity ádiná árshasya árdhamagadhabháshániyatatvam ámnáyi víddhais tad api prdyo 'aya wa vidhánát, na vakshyamánalakshanakya ; 1.6., "what has been said by tho ancients regarding the rules of tho old languago being governed by thoso of the Arddha. mágadhi,' that may be also understood of tho present rule (viz. H. C. 4, 287), but of that rule only, not of the succecdiny ones.' Jacobi's intorprotation of this important passage, if I understand it rightly, somewhat differs from mino; though the general tenor is the same. (See Kalpa Sútra, p. 17.) I do not think Jacobi has quite caught Hemachandra's meaning. Hemachandra does not wish to contradict the old tradition, but only guard his own grammar against a wrong intorpretation of it. "Rightly anderstood”, he means to say, " the old tradition confirms my grammar, for it refers only to the first role, not to the whole of my chapter on Mágadhi." † As a minor evidence of Chanda's Prákrit being the Araha, I may mention the 1 ·XX INTRODUCTION. It would at the same time seem to be proved by Chanda's Grammar, that at that early period, the later division into Arddhamágadhí, Mabáráshtrí and Sauraseni probably did not yet exist; but that these three later subdivisions originally formed but one great language, which was looked upon as the (standard). Prákrit. By the side of this great or standard Prákrit, however, there existed two other Prákrits of lesser importance, which, while. substan. tially the same as the standard Prákrit, yet in a few very striking peculiarities differed from it. These two lesser Prákrits were the Mágadhi and the Apabhrainşa. Tho striking peculiarity of the former was the Change of mo and s to l and respectively; that of the latter was the retention of yo as part of a conjunct. That this was the state of the Prákrits in Chanda's time is very clearly shown by his Grammar (comp. III, 37, 39). The question is, is it possible to fix historically the time when that was the case. I believe we have in the language of the famous Rock-inscriptions of Aşoka the means of approximately fixing the date. I cannot do better than quote on this subject the remarks of General A. Cunningham in his Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, vol. I, p. 43.* The Inscriptions of Aşoka are quite invaluable for the study of the vernacular languages of India, as they present us with several undoubted and authentic texts of the common language of tho people in the third century B. C. As revealed in these engraved records, this spoken language was essentially the samet throughout the wide and fertile regions lying between the Himalaya and Vindhya, from the banks of the Indus to the mouths of the Ganges. There are, however, some marked points of difference, which show that there were at least three distinct varieties of Páli (or Príkrit) in the time of Aşoka. These may be called, according to their geographical distribution, the Panjábí or northwestern dialect, the Ujjení or middle dialect, and the Mágadhi or eastern dialect." General Cunningham, then, enumerates those "marked points of difference,” The chief characteristic of the Panjábí or the dialect of North- Western India, he says, “is the retention of the subjoined poll; that of the Magadhi or the castern dialect is "the entire want of the letter r, for which 1 is uniformly substituted.” (Corp. I. I. Pp. 43, 44.) If we substitute Apabhramşa for General Cunningham's Panjábí, we have almost the very words of Chanda's Grammar. It would be, however, going too far, I think, to ascribe that Grammar to the third century B. C. Probably it was com. fuct, that certain forms which are expressly noted by Hemachandra as peculiar to the Arsha, are given no ordinary forms by Chapda ; 6. 8., kattu II, 19, cf. H. C. II, 146; swAuman or suhanum III, 30, cf. H. C. II, 101, 113, etc. See, however, Lassen's similar remarks in his Indian Antiquities, vol. II, p. 221 (quoted in Muir's Sanskrit Tests, vol. II, pp. 109, 132). + The italics in the extract are mine.

·No text on this page.

·Inscription with and 1 ! ( Subjoint Howtar l'Eiviru un 118402H Pret:271 Subalni 2015 of Shuchhahi love heydou ! B Tood mittee W Bhhur toimimme 11 MK K 11 MA MAP Athne OF INDIA ...lethern Irelas SHAWING THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE PRAKRIT LANGUAGES South India IN B C. 300-1. Lith ind In (alanna ·INTRODUCTION. xxi posed at a somewhat later time; for the elision of the sonant unaspirates and the reduction to h of the sonant aspirates appear to bave been a much more generally prevailing practice in the language of the time of Chanda, than in that of the time of Apoka, as exhibited in bis Rock-inscriptions. As to the Paigáchí, mentioned by Chaqda in III, 38, it is providod for by orm" at least" in the above quoted extract from General Cunninghas work. My view of the Paişáchí, as I have explained more fully els here (see Introduction to my Comparative Grammar of the Gaudian Languages), is that it is the name for the generally prevailing Prákrit, as pronounced or rather mis-pronounced by the aboriginal population. An attempt may now be made, with the help of the known localities of the Inscriptions, to approximately deterining the boundaries of the arcus, respectively occupied by the Prákrit languages, named by Chanda. Ono of the principal peculiarities of the Mágachi or Eastern Prákrit, mentioned by Chanda, is the substitution of 1 for r.† This is found in the Inscriptions of Khalsi, Mirat, Lauriya, Sahasarám, Barábar, Rúmnagarh, Dhauli and Jaugaða (sco Map) | At Bairát, one inscription shows it, the other does not; and the same is the case at Allalábád. If, thorefore, a line be drawn from Khalsi, southward to Bairát, thence castward to A'lahábád and again southward by Rámagash to Jaugada, that line will be tho approximato woundary between the Eastern or Mágadhí, and the Western or Chanda's Standard Prákrit. Tho foriner thus occupies the whole of Eastern India and the north-eastern half of Central India. The Standard Prakrit, on the other hand, occupies the south-western half of Central India, the whole of Western India and an indefinite part of Southern India, probably down to the southern limits of the Maláráshțra, Andhra and Kalinga kingdoms. The Northern or Apabbramşa Prákrit occupies Northern India, west of the Indus, where the Sháhbázgarlií Inscription exhibits the peculiarity, attributed by Chanda to that Prákrit, viz. the retention of the subjoined r. Further Chanda mentions that in the Standard (or western) Prákrit, tho nominative singular sometimes ends with an e, sometimes with an o. Now the Inscriptions at Sanchi and Rúpanáth show the termination while • Professor Jacobi, in the introduction to his excellent edition of the Kalpa Sutra, inontions another sign of the old vernacular, which appcars to be borne out by Chanda's grain: "A trace of a still older phase of the languago (thun Juina Prákrit) is the optional insertion of a vowel between two consonants incapable of assimilation" (800 p. 19, also P. 4). This seems to be indicated by Chanda's sútra III, 30. + With regard to the other peculiarity of substituting the palatal , for the dental , the Inscriptions seem to give no evidenco; except one of them at Rámagarh, which has throughout. This map is based on the frontispioco-maps in General Cunningham's Ancient Geography of India, Vol. I, and his Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, VOL. I. mar.

·INTRODUCTION. those of Girnár, Dootek and Khandagiri have o. Thus a line drawn from Bairát, in a south-easterly direction towards Deotek and thence eastward to the Mégadhi area, will approximately divide the e-area of the Western Prakrit from its o-area. The former of these two areas may be described as that of, what was afterwards called, the Arddhamagadhí Prákrit, because this Prákrit possesses the termination e in common with the Mágadhí. The other subdivisional area will, then, be that of, what in later times come to be called, the Mäháráshțri and Saurasení Prákrits. The Paişáchí must have been current in the southern half of Central India and in the whole of Southern India, in the wild regions to the north and south of the Vindhya range of mountains. Another cbronological question, on which the foregoing investigations throw some light, is that of the relative age of Chanda and his Revisionists with regard to the two other well-known Prákrit Grammarians, Vararuchi and Hemachandra. As regards the latter, I have already (p. xiv) incidentally shown grounds for believing that he must have been acquainted with Chanda's Grammar, in the recension of the Revisionists. Indeed, as to Chanda's Grammar generally, that is almost capable of demonstration. In bis sútra III, 81 Hemachandra rules that the three pronouns idam, tad, etad assume the form se in the genitive singular and the form sim in the genitive plural; but he adds that " another Grammarian allows the form se also in the genitive plural of the two pronouns idum and tad".* The singular number another Grammarian" is noteworthy. It cannot refer to Vararuchi ; because the latter (VII, 11, 12) agrees with Hemachandra in the distribution of the forms se and sim to the singular and plural respectively; and moreover Vararuchi allows those forms only to the pronoun tad. On the other hand, Hemachandra's remark exactly agrees with Chanda's statement in his sútra I, 17, that "the two pronouns tad and islam assume the form se in the genitive of both the singular and plural".+ The coincidence is too striking to be merely accidental. Of course, this would leave it still an open question, whether or not Hemachandra is prior to the Revisionists of Chanda. But on the whole, I have come to the conclusion, that the latter must be placed earlier than Hemachandra. It is true, that most of the additional matter in C and D, is also found in Hemachandra's Grammar, in some casos expressed in the very same words. But the manner of its arrangement and wording seem clearly to show, that it is original in C D, and that Hemachandra in writing his owu grammar drew on the text of C D rather than that the latter rearradged and modified Hemachandra's rules. Thus the wording of some Tulos in CD is very inacourate, as compared with the corresponding rule in: Idam-cado ámápi se bdepan kapohid ichokhati, H. C. III, 81. tistisaynon se shquhtimádnám, Ch. I, 17.

·INTRODUCTION. xxiii Hemachandra (compare, e. g., Ch. II, Go with H. C. III, 14, 24). Some old Prákrit forms to which C D devoto special rule(II, 13a, 180) are subsumed by Hemachandra under another rule (H. C. III, 137).* Many peculiar forms, mentioned by C D as belonging to the ordinary Prákrit, are referred by Hemachandra to the Apabhramșa dialect (compare, e. g., Ch. II, 377 with H. C. IV, 444). All this is hardly likely to havo been done by any one working with Hemachandra's grammar beforo bis eyes; whereas it is natural that Homachandra, having before him the text of C D and noticing its inaccuracies and inconsis. tencies, should have set about remodelling and rearranging it. The only evidence of any moment, which seems to make for the priority of Hemachandra is the sútra I, 16, where tho Revisionists have olidod tho d, while Hemachandra in his corresponding sútra III, 8 still preservos it. But tho evidence on the other side scems to me much strongor, and I think it, therefore, more probablo, that the text of C and 1, so far at least as it is common to both, is older than Hemachandra. On the other hand, it can be demonstrated that the text of MS. 1), with its peculiar additions of sútras II, la, 10, lc, is later than Ilemachandra. The corrosponding sútras in Hemachandra aro I, 5, 6, 8. Two of them, indeod, viz., I, 6 and I, 8, are, word for word, the saine as Ch. II, la an' I, 16. But it will be observed that in liemachandra the order is reversed. Sútra II, 16 in MS. D corresponds to H. C. I, 8, while II, 1c in MS. D corresponds to H.C. 1, 6. That Hemachandra's order is the correct one follows from the fact, that the negativo particle na not", which must be understood in sútra I, 8 in order to make it intelligible, is, according to a well-known practice of sútra-works, supplied from the preceding sútra I, 6. On the other band in MS. D, the sútra II, 16, as it is not preceded by any sútra containing the negative particle, remains simply unintelligible, unless, contrary to the well-established practice, the negative particle is supplied from the succeeding . * It may bo noted that the omission of all mention of those old Frákrit forma in tho text of the MS. A B makes for the antiquity of the latter. For it shows that in their time these forms wore not "old" or obsoluto, but fresh and living, and called for no special remark. + Many other evidences for the priority of C and D with regard to Hencachandra will be noticed in the footnotes to the English translation. I will mention hero only one. Sapposing that Hemachandra knew the text of C and D, ho could not help noticing the discrepancy betwoon its aútras III, 34 and III, 12. What more natural than to accept sútra III, 34, which was in conformity with the then stato of tho Prakrit language, as the principal rule, and subsume sútra III, 12 under it as an exception? Now this is, what Hemachandra actually has done ;;(see H.C. L, 177 and compare the examplos). This, at all events, is a much more probablo explanation of the circumstances, than to suppose the reverse to have taken place. See also the footnoto on p. xiv.

·xxiy INTRODUCTION. sátra. This appears to me to be conclusive as to the priority of Hema chandra. It might be thought, at first sight, that the fact, that Hemachandra's sútra IV, 353 is found in MS. C, but not in MS. D, goes to prove similarly that the text of C also is later than Hemachandra. But I think.it exceedingly probable that the omission of that sútra in D is quite accidental, perhaps even a mere error of the writer of my copy. For omitting from D the sútras II, 1a, 1b, Ic wbich are undoubtedly drawn from Hemachandra I, 5, 6, 8, MS. D has only one sútra less than MS. C, and as the text of the two is otherwise nearly identical, it is more than probable that sútra I, lla ought to be supplied in D.* As regards the relative age of Vararuchi and Chanda, the indications seem sufficiently marked to attempt a decision. The treatment of the ablative suffixes do and du in Vr. V, 6 as compared with their treatment by the Revisionists in I, 16, makes it certain, that Vararuchi is earlier than the Revisionists, who possibly may have been guided by his grammar in making their revisions of Chanda. The strange circumstance that the Revisionists, though evidently men of the Jain community, yet, contrary to the practice of Jaina Prákrit, changed every dental n to cerebral », seems to be strongly confirmatory of an influence on them by the absolute rule (II, 42) of Vararuchi's grammar. Hemachandra's rules (I, 228, 229), undecided as they are, could not have influenced them. (See remarks on p. xxv). On the other hand the terms of Vr. II, 2 as compared with those of Ch. III, 34 in MSS. A and B, would seem to make it equally certain, that Vararuchi was later than Chanda. But as to whether he was acquainted with Chanda's work, there is too little evidence to form an opinion. On the whole, I should think it improbable. A SKETCH OF CHAŅDA'S GRAMMAR, COMPARED WITH THOSE OF VARARUCHI AND HEMACHANDRA. 1, VOWELS. The vowel system does not materially differ from that of the ordinary .Prákrit. But many of the peculiarities of the latter do not yet show them. selves in the earlier Prákrit of Chanda. In common with the later, the old Prákrit does not possess the following anskrit vowels; ri (II, 5), ai (II, 6), au (II, 8) and the protracted wluta, II, 14). Nothing is said regarding rí, lți, lțí, but they seem: to be included in the term svarṇasya (11, 5).. • A similar accidental omission of sútra I, 15 has occurred in the case of MB. B.

·INTRODUCTION. XXV = Shr, Instead of ri, either the syllable ri or any other voirel («, i, u, (,0) may be used, according to circumstances (IT, 5). Instead of ni cither ni or , and instead of an either aii or o, may bo useşl, according to circumstances (11, 6-9): but not i, i and X, as in liter Prakrit. With regard to the changes of those vowels which the old Prikrit possesses, there are the following two brouillaus: 1. Alony row'cl (ii, i, ii) preceiling a conjunct consonant is shortenel (0, 1, 1), II, 3. Iemachandra's rule, 11. C. I, S1, corresponds to this; Vararuchi hits no corresponding rule, see ('owell, p. 185. 2. The final rourl of the former part of a compound voril is droppeil, if the initiul lowel of the latter part is followed by al conjunct ronsonant (II, 2); e. y.,ilerne + indre would in Sanskrit bedercourir, but in the tradit the final r of leeu is dided, hence the compound is dermis.* There is nothing corresponding to this rule in vither Vararnehi or Tlemachandrit; they apparently did not acknowledge it. But evidences of the change to which the rule refers are by no means incommon, even in the later Jaina Prakrit; thus in the Bhagavati vceur yogure = Skri yoyopayoyal, "PPSIC Skr. alpotsukth, pued! Upplit Shr. prali-ul pannu, suluttural saptotlarım, (sce Weber's erlition, 17, 350, 101, 10S, 127). (a the other land the later Prakrit changes of, to short, cand of 16 to short o (Vr. 1, 12, 20. 11. ('. I, S., 116) are known tu (hadi. Thus we have guhati in Ch III, 23 for genhu, in 11. ( IV, 209. J'or the rest, rouels are liuble to a great cariety of interchanges, and that, whether they occür in it single worl (11, 1) or when they occur at the point of junction in it compound word or even at the point of contact of two words in it sentence (11, 1). It is this misecany of changes, sumed up by C'handa in two short rules (1, 1, 1), the aparate enumeration of which in distinct rules has given rise to the great expansion of the chapter on vowels in the Grammars of Vararnchi and Ilemachandri. It is quite possible, however, that a few of the interchanges, noted by the latter, did not yet obtain in the earlier Prakrit. 2, COYSONANTS. With regard to the Consonants, there are five points in which the older Prakrit of Chanda differs from its later forms, its exhibited in Vararucli and Hemachandra. 1. The preservation of the vental », in ewry ca-e, whether single or double, whether initial or medial in a worel. This follows from sútra II, 11 • Ilomachundia mcutions this very word in an Iraku suutcuce, detenido eran abbati sce H. C. III, 162.

·xxviii INTRODUCTION. The other consonants of the Sanskrit system, which the old Prákrit possesses, are subject to the following laws : a, Single Consonants. 1, Final consonants are either dropped or changed to anuspára or pregerved by the addition of the vowel a (II, 11. III, 33). In Vararuchi and Hemachandra those cases are particularised in a number of separate sútras (Vr. IV, 6--12. H. C. I, 11-24). 2, Modial sonant unaspirate mute consonants are elided, (III, 34), though there are occasional exceptions (III, 30, C D II, 26). 3, Medial sonant aspirates are reduced to h (III, 13). 4, Initial g is once (in gharam) said to become gh (III, 20). 5, [In those cases, where j las arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct (jñ), it becomes 1 (III, 19)]. 0, d sometimes changes to 1 (III, 21). Only ono example (solasa) is given, but it is probably incant as a type of others. In later times, at all events, this change was not uncommon ; sec C D III, 21. Vr. II, 23. H. C. I, 202. 7, ? changes to n in Paiņáchí (III, 38). 8, Dental consonants (incl. n) exceptionally change to the corresponding cerebral (III, 16). [In those cases where they have arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct (ty, dy, sth, etc.) they may change to the corresponding palatal or cerebral (III, 10); once (in khambho) such a th becomes kh (III, 19)]. 9, Once (in vammatho) m changes to v (III, 21). 10, Initial y becomes j (III, 15); except in the second personal pronominal base, where it becomes t (III, 17). Medial y remains unchanged (see abovo, No. 4, p. xxvii); except in the passive where it is changed to jj (III, 25), and in those cases in which it is vocalized to i and combines with the adjacent vowels (III, 31). [In those cases where y has arisen from an original Sanskrit conjunct, it becomes j or, exceptionally, 1 (III, 15, 22)]. In teraha it is apparently said to become 1 (III, 22); but the same word is explained differently in III, 31. 11, r remains unchanged; excepting a few rare cases in which it is said to change to 8 or ? (III, 18, 20). These exceptions, however, can be explained differerftly. In the Paiņáchí and Mágadhí dialects it always changes to l (III, 38, 39). 12, v remains unchanged (see above, No. 4, p. xxvii), excepting those few cases of medial v, in which it is vocalized and combines with the adjacent vowels (III, 31). Once (in rukkho) it is said to become r (III, 22). 2 ·INTRODUCTION xxix' 13, 8 remains unchanged, excepting a few cases in which it becomos h (III, 14). In Mágadhí, however, it always changes to $ (III, 39). [In those cases where it has arisen from & Sanskrit sh or conjunct consonant, it may change to kh or chh or h (III, 14)]. 14, h remains unchanged ; excepting one case (gharam) where it is said to become r (III, 19). [In those cases where it has arisun from an original Sanskrit conjunct (hy, hv), it changes to jh or Oh (III, 20, 21)]. b, Conjunct Consonants. In the treatment of these the older Prakrit is altogether in accord with the later. They may be dealt with in two ways:- 1, either they may be dissolved by interposing some short vowel (a or i or w), III, 30. 2, or they may be simplificd by eliding one of them (III, 1-1) and doubling the other (III, 24, 27). As regards doubling; an aspirate is reduplicated by means of the corresponding unaspirate (III, 20); and it never takes place in the beginning of a word (III, 28), nor in a few exceptional cases (III, 29). With regard to elision Chanda's formal system much i'iffers from that usod in Vararuchi and Hemachandra, though the material resule is the same. In the latter Grammarians most conjuncts are changed bodily to a singlo consonant (see Vr. III, I-06. H. C. II, 1–115); but Chanda strictly carries out the theory of clision For this purpose he arranges the consonants according to their degree of persistency, thus 1, y, v, l, h, class consonants (incl. nasals), sibilants. Here each consonant resists those preceding it, but gives way to those succeeding it. Thus 1 gives way under all circumstances (III, 9, exc. in the Apabhramșa III, 37); y gives way to v, l, h, etc. (III, 1, 2, 3, 5), but not to gives way to 1 (III, 2) or h (III, 1) or the class-consonants (III, 3, 5) or sibilants (III, 2), but not to r and y (III, 2, 9); 1 gives way to the class-consonants (III, 3, 5) or sibilants (III, 2), but not to r, y, v (III, 2, 9); h gives way to the class-consonants (III, 3), but not to y and.v (III, 1); the class-consonants, including the nasals, give way to the sibilants (III, 4, 6, 8), but not to r(III, 3, 5, I) or y, v, 1 (III, 3, 5) or h (III, 3); lastly a sibilant gives way to no other consonant (III, 2, 4, 8), except to a succeeding single class-consonant or nasal (III, 3, 6 in sk, sp, shỉ, gn, si, 8m, shm, etc.). This is his principle of elision. But his principle of arranging the sútras is the order of the letters in the alphabet. He commences with the last letter in the alphabet h (III, 1), then proceeds to the sibilants and semi-consonants (III, 2); next he takes the class-consonants (III, 3-8); and lastly he gives the peculiar case of r, which is always elided (III, 9). The six sútras, referring to the class-consonants, are arranged according to the 14 ;

·XXX INTRODUCTION. principle of the order of the elided letter in the conjunct. First Chanda gives two rules about eliding the first in the conjunct (III, 3, 4), then one rule about eliding the second in the conjunct (III, 5), lastly three rules about optionally eliding the first or the second (III, 6-8). After the elision has been made and before the doubling takes place, the romaining single consonants undergo some highly artificial changes. These have been already enumerated under the rules regarding the changes of single consonants where they are indicated by being placed within angular brackets. Here it only remains to add, that when the remaining single consonant happens to be a palatal or cerebral sibilant ($ or sh), it is ipso facto (i. e. by silent reference to III, 18) supposed to be changed to the dental 8 and treated as such in regard to the needful change before doubling (see remarks on pp. ix, x). The reason of this will be at once understood, when it is recollected (see p. xxvii), that those two sibilants are the only consonants of the Sanskrit phonetic system (beside & í and 5 ñ) which do not exist in Prákrit. It may be well to illustrate Chanda's highly artificial system of treating conjuncts by a few examples, as lakshmi, krshnan, spashtam, sthitaḥ, vidyá, jihvá, váhynh. Hero Laksimí first becomes lakshí (by III, 6), then lashi (III, 4) or lasi (III, 18); next lachhi (III, 14), finally lachchhi (III, 24, 20). KĶsiņam becomes first krnam (III, 6) or kaņon (II, 5), and then kaņham (111, 23). SPASIIȚAM becomes first pashtam (III, 3) or pushtam (II, 4), then phushtam (III, 11, 28), finally phutam (III, 8); or pushtam may become puţum (111, 8), then putham (III, 11), finally puttham (III, 24, 26). Srutaụ becomes first thitaḥ (III, 3), then thitaḥ (III, 16, 28), then thitao (II, 10), finally thito (11, 1). Videá first becomes viilá (III, 5), then vija (III, 16), finally vijjá (III, 24, 27). Jiiva' becomes first jihá (III, 1), then jibha (III, 21), finally jibblui (III, 24, 26). VA'uyaụ becomes first váhaḥ (III, 1), then vájhah (III, 20), then vájjhaḥ (111, 24, 26), then vajjhaḥ (II, 3), next vajjhao (II, 10), finally vajjho (II, 1). It will be now understood from the preceding remarks, why the division of the third chapter of Chanda’s Grammar into two parts, one (III, 1-9) on conjuncts, the other (III, 9–39) on single consonants, is such an im. portant, and even essential, feature of his gramınatical arrangement. To abolish that division, as tho Revisionists bave done, is to destroy its symmetry and coherency. 3, ANUSTÁRA. The anusvára is employed in as promiscuous a manner in the older Prákrit (II, 15, 11), as in the later (H. C. I, 23-30. Vr. IV, 12-17). It is not only usod where it also occurs in Sanskrit ; but sometimes it takes ·INTRODUCTION. xxxi the place of an elided consonant, wbich may have been either the final of a word (II, 11) or the first part of a conjunct (II, 15); or again it may be added at the end of a word for the mere sake of euphony (11, 15). 4, VISARGA. The visarga in the older Prákrit, as in the later, is never tolerated (II, 10). It is either dropped altogether or changed into o or e or r. The change to o or e occurs, e. g., in the nominative singular, that to r in purarapi (compare H. C. II, 179). 5, Nouns. e or Singular. Plural. The older Prákrit, like the later, has three genders, masculino, feminino and neuter (I, 2); but the gender is variable (1, 4). It has also liko it, only two numbers, singular and plural, the latter being also used in tho place of the Sanskrit dual (II, 12). It further has only six cases, the genitive being used in the place of the dative (II, 13).* The six cases with their casc-suffixos are the following, for masculine nouns : Nom. o, e (II, 10) or- (I, 11) or no (I, 12). Acc. am (1, 3) (I 11, 15), no (I, 12) Intr. iņa or ná (1, 3) hi (him) (1,7). Abl. á, to, tu, hinto or ņo (I, 12, 16) hinto (1, 8). Gen. ssa or no (I, 13) ጊባ, ha (nam, ham) (1,5). Loc, e, mmi (I, 14) 82 (sum) (1, 3). N. B.--The forms given after “or” belong to nouns in i and u, the others are general, except those of the nom., instr., abl. singular and acc. plural and e of the loc. sing. which belong to nouns in a The sign (-) means absence of any suffix. The vocative sing. and voc. plur. arc nowhere noticed by Chanda, which may be explained in two ways, cither that their forms were the same as in Sanskrit, or that they were the samo as those of the old Prákrit nominative. Feminine nouns add the same suffixes, except in the instr., abl., gen. and loc. sing., where they take the suffix e (I, 9), and in the nom. and acc. plural, where they take the suffixes o or u or no suffix (I, 10). Neuter nouns also take the same suffixes, as the masculines, except in the nom. and acc. plural, where they add the suffix ņi (I, 3). N. B.--Those suffixes which are used independently of the gender of the word Chanda indicates by the term lingát parasya (1, 7, 8), unless where the fact is otherwise obvious (as in I, 3, 5). • It is one of the clumsy inconsistencies of the Rovisionists of O D that they insert the word sapta " geven" in the commentary to sútra I, 3. Chanda had very properly omitted it, as sútra II, 13 shows that Prákrit has only six cases, ·1. INTRODUCTION. In adding these suffixes, the final vowel of the base of the word may undergo the same changes of elision or Bandhi as in Sanskrit 3. II, 1), or it may be exchanged with other vowels (II, 4). Thus in the acc. sing. deva + am = devam (II, 1), aggi + am = aggim (II, 1, 4), dhenu + am = dhenum (II, 1, 4 see marginal gloss on p. 3); nom. sing. deva +0= devo (II, 1); deva + e= deve (II, 1); inst. sg. deva + ina = deveņa (II, 1); buddhi + 6 = buddhíc (II, 4); loc. sg. deva te deve (II, 1); nom. acc. plur. buddhi +0= buddhío (II, 4); inst. pl. deva + hi = devehi (II, 4); loc. plur. deva + 8u = devesu (II, 4), etc. See also the additional remarks in the Analysis of Chanda's nominal declension. Prákrit has only three declensions ; viz. those ending in a (or feminine d), i and u (or feminine in i and ú). Nouns ending in é or ú are generally declined like those in i and u (see, e. 8., I, 9), but masculines in i and ú are nowhere especially mentioned by Chanda. Nouns originally ending in a consonant either drop the final consonant or add a to it, so that they come under one of the three declensions in a or i oru (see II, 11). Nouns originally ending in și are nowhere noticed by Chanda, but they would probably como under one of the three declensions by the operation of the rulo II, 5, by which yi would change to u and, in some cases, to ara or ára, ag in Páli and the later Prakrit. There is one exceptional declension ; viz. that of the word go " cattle" (11, 16). . a, Declension in a. The nom. sing. ends in o or e masc., e. g., dero or deve ; é fem., e. g., gangá ; am neut., e. 5., kulam. The acc. sing. ends in an masc. and ncut., e. g., deram, kulam; ám fem., 0. 8., gangánu. The instr. sing. ends in eņa masc. and neut, e g., deveņa, kulena ; de fem., e. g., gangie. The abl. sing. ends in á or áto or átu or áhinto masc. and neut., e. g., devá or deváto or devátu or derdhinto, kulú, ctc.; de fem., 0. 8., gangáe. To these forms may be added the abl. made with the suffix to ( Sanskrit tah). It is not noticed by Chanda, because it is not technically a declensional form. For the same reason it is separately noticed by Kachchayana (II, 5, 1, p. 116). But its existence in the Arsha is guaranteed by its existence in Páli, and by its existence in the modified forın tto in the later Prakrit (H. C. 8); also by the existence in the Arsha itself of the pronominal forms maitto, taitto (I, 24, 28). The gen. sing. ends in assa masc. and neut., e. g., devassa. Curiously enough the genitive sing. of a-bases is nowhere noticed, unless it be indirectly taught by sútra I, 13. The latter was the opinion of the Revisionists; and ·INTRODUCTION. xxxiii -- it is possible that on that account they may bave removed it from I, 8, where one would naturally expect to find it mentioned by Chanda. Fem. áo, e. g., gangáo. The loc. sing. ends in e or ammi masc. and neut., e. g., deve or devamni, kulo or kulammi ; as fem., e.g., gangas. The nom. plur. ends in á maso., e. 8., devá; do or aü ör á fem., e. g., gangáo, gangáu, gangá ; neut. áni or áni, e. g., Kuláni or kulári. The acc. plur. ends in e maso., e. g. deve; io or ai or a fem., eg., gangáo, gangáū, gangá; áni or áņi neut., e. g., kulani or kuldni. The instr. plur. ends in chi or ehim (II, 15) masc. and neut., e.g., devchi, or devehim, kulehi or kulehim ; dhi or áhim fem., e. g., gangáhi or gangáhim. The gen. plur. ends in ana or áha or áram or áham (II, 16); e. g., dována or deváha or devánam or deváham, gangaña, etc., kulána, etc. The loc. plur. ends in eau or ssum (II, 15) masc. and neut., e.g., devesu or devesum, kulesu or kulesum ; ásu or úsum fem., e. g., gangásu or gangásum. In the following scheme I have added the corresponding Sanskrit, Páli and later Prákrit or Arddha-Mágadhi forms for purposes of comparison. Masculines in a. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit.. Sing. Nom. | देवः देवो fat or fat देवो or देवे हे देव or देवो Voc.हे देव रेदेव रेदेव or देवा Acc. देखें देव देव Instr. देवेन देवेन देवान् देवा देवा देवा देवतो देवतो Abl.. देवतः देवतो o वातु देवायो or वाज देवाvिar or देवाधि देवन्हा or •मा | देवारितो देवस्था Gen. | देवस्थ देवस h Loo. देवन्धिor .सिंदेवम्मि विधि Plur. Nom. देवाः देवा देवा Voc. • The forms in this column are from Hemachandra's Grammar. † Arddha-Magadht; so 8. O. IV, 287.

·xxxiy INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. देखें Acc. देशान Instr.तो देवेभि or देहि देवेyि or of देवेभ्यः देवेभि or हि देवेदिता Abl. देवा or देवे tafor fi or off देवेहिंसो or तो देवारिता or •हुँतो देवाणं or देवास देवाएं or or देवेसु or •तुं देवाना देवान देवा or देवास Gen. देवा or •ह Loc. देवेषु देवेस देवेसु or •हुं Feminines in a. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. Sing. Nom.| गंगा गंगा गंगा गंगा Voc. गंगे गंगे गंगा or गंगे गंगा or गंगे Acc. | गंगा गंग गंगां गंग Instr. गंगया Abl. गंगायाः गंगाय गंगार | गंगार or or or . Gen, Loc. गंगा (or loc. गंगाय) Plur. Nom. गंगा गंगा गंगा Voc. -गंगा गंगायो गंगाको or गंगाज गंगापो or गंगा Acc. Instr. मंगाभिः गंगाभि or गंगालि गंगारि ort siat oroftorofa Abl. | गंगाभ्यः गंगामि or गंगाडि गंगाषितो गंगारितो or Kतो. गंगाना गंगान गंगावं or मंगार गंगासं or मंगार Gen. गंगा or or मंगाई or or Loo. गंगाट मंगार समाह or • मंगानु or . • Or abl. - abl. maso, exc, the forma in á and áhi, see H. C. III. 128. 127.

·INTRODUCTION. XXXY Neuters in a. Arsha. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Prakrit. Sing. Nom. Aco. "Voc. | कुंज Plur. Nom. Voc. कुहामि gratfor or gre gonfa or of grifa or error, Acc. सार The remainder like masc. in a. b, Declensions in i and u. These two are treated alike, mutatis mutandis ; thus:- The nom. sing. ends in i and w; e. g., masc. aggi, guru ; føm. buddhi, dhenu; neut. dahi, mahu. The acc. sing. ends in im and un; e. g., masc. aggin, gurum ; fem. buddhim, dhenum ; neut, dahim, mahum. The instr. sing. ends in iņá and uņá masc. and neut., e. 8., aggiņa, guruná and dahiņá, mahuná ; íe and úe fem., e. g., buddhie, dhenúe. The abl. sing. ends in iņo and uno masc. and neut., 6. 8., aggino, guruno and dahiņo, mahuņo; ie and úe fem., e. g., buddhie, dhenús. There is also the quasi-abl. in ito and uto; e. g., aggito, guruto, etc. The gen. sing. ends in iño or i88a and uņo or usra masc. and neut., e. g., aggiño or aggissa, guruņo or gurussa and dahiņo or dahi88a, mahuņo or mahussa ; 18 and úe fem., e. g., buddhie, dhenúe. The loc. sing. ends in immi and ummi masc. and neut., e. g., aggimmi, gurummi and dahimmi, mahummi ; íe and úe fem., e. 8 , buddhie, dhenúe. The nom, and acc. plur. end in ayo or í or iņo and avo or ú or uno masc., 8. g., aggayo or aggi or aggino, guravo or gurú or guruņo ; é or ío or íu anđú or úo or yu fem., e. 8., buddhi or buddhío or buddhiu, dhenú or dhenúo or dhenúy. The neuter is not noticed ; probably ini and úni; e. 8., dahini, mahúni; or possibly like the masculine, dahi or dahino, mahú or mahuno. The masculine forms in ayo and avo are not especially noticed by Chanda, because they are too obviously the same as the Sanskrit forms in ayaḥ, avaḥ, and would come under bis general rule I, 8. Their existence is guaranteed by the Páli on the one side, and the later Prákrit on the other. (Vararuchi V, 16 specially notes a nom. and acc. form in eo and úo, which is the same as nyo and avo, with ay, ao contracted to é, ú respectively.)

·"хххуі INTRODUCTION. ; . The instr. plur. ends in ihi or shin, and whi or whim ; e. g., masc. aggiki or aggihip, guruhi or guruhim; fem. buddhihi or buddhihim, dhenuhi or dhonuhim ; neut. dahihi or dahihim, mahuhi or mahuhim. The abl. plur. ends in ihinto and whinto; e. g., masc. aggihinto, guruhinto; fem. buddhihinto, dhenuhinto; nout. dahihinto, mahuhinto. The gen. plur. ends in iņa or tha or inam or íham, and úna or úha or úran or úham ; 6. 8., masc. aggina or agginar or aggíha or aggíhans, gurúna or gurúnar or gurúha or gurúham; fem, buddhiņa or buddhiha, etc., dhenúna or dhenúha, etc.; neut. dahiņa or dahiha, etc., mahúņa or mahúha, etc. The loc. plur. ends in isu or isum and usu or usum; masc. aggisu or aggisum, gurusu or gurusum ; fem. buddhisu or buddhisum, dhenusu or dhenusum; neut. dahisu or dahisum, mahusu or mahusum. To the voc. sing. and plur. the same remark applies as to the voc. of the a-declension. Unfortunately there is not a little untrustworthiness and inconsistency in the MSS., regarding this declension. Yet with a careful combination of all indications, it is not impossible to recognise its real circumstances. The main points are four : (1). In sútra I, 3 all MSS. make the termination of the nom. sing. of all nouns in i and X, of whatever gender, to be í and ú. This is almost certainly false; for (a) even in the later Prákrit of Vararuchi (V, 30) and Hemachandra (III, 25) the nom. sing. neuter ends in short i and w; and (b) what is more important, there is no sútra in Chanda's grammar to account for the long i and ú of the nom. sing., as compared with the short į and l of the Sanskrit. I shall show afterwards in the Analysis of Chanda's rules on nominal declension that Chaņda enumerates in sútra I, 8 all those declensional forms which are like the corresponding Sanskrit forms (samskritavad vibhaktayaḥ), excepting so far as they are modified by the goneral phonetic laws of the Prákrit. Now by sútra II, 10 the visarga of the Sanskrit nominative singular termination iḥ or uḥ is omitted, bụt there is no sútra anywhere in Chaņda to enjoin the lengthening of the resultant short i or u. Hence it is very probable, that in Chanda's Prákrit the nominative singular ended in s, and similarly in t. But further, the probability is strongly confirmed by a curious undesigned coincidence. In sútra II, 5 there occurs the word fishiḥ, the Prákrit form of which in all MSS. is given as isi (not ist); again in that very sútra II, 10 one example is vati, as all MSS. read, for Skr. ositiſ* ; again in sútra II, 17 we bave mati and gati, with all MSS. (exo. B). Thus the inconsistency of the Revisionists brings out the truth ! Páli, which Chanda's Prákrit resembles in so many • Not Skt. patil, aw OD bave it, bat =Ska, upitiņ, ·INTRODUCTION. Xxxvü ways, affords & further confirmation of the truth; for there the nom. sing. also ends in i and (see Minayef, pp. 64, 68, 69). Accordingly I have restored the short i and w in the nom. sing. throughout. ..(2) It is very similar with the instr., abl., and loc. plural. Here all MSS. read long i and ú before the suffixes hi, hinto and 84. But as Chanda has no sútra to enjoin the lengthening of i and u, it is probable that in his Prákrit they were not long, as in the later Prákrit, but short, as (optionally) in Páli (see Minayef ibid., also Kuhn, pp. 79, 81, 82). The fact that Chanda plaves the forms of the instr. and loc. plural under sútra 1, 3, which enumerates whatever in declension was like Sanskrit, tends in the same direction; and it is further curiously confirmed by his excluding the abl. plural from sútra I, 3. Suppose, e. g., that aggíhi, aggíhinto and aggisu be correct forms ; if so, all three forms would have to be excluded from sútra 1, 8, as they are all unlike Sanskrit on account of their long é ; but let the forms be aggihi, aggihinto, aggisu, then only aggihinto is unlike Skr. agnibhyaḥ, on account of hinto, and must be excluded from I, 3, whereas aggihi is like Skr. agnibhiḥ (” being dropped by II, 10 and bh becoming h by III, 13) and aggisu like Skr. agnishu (sh becoming 8 by III, 18); hence these two forms will come under I, 3. This is precisely what we find Chanda to have actually done ; it follows that his premises must have been what we have supposed them to have been. Accordingly I have restored the short i throughout in those three cases. In confirmation of the above reasoning it should be noticed, that whenever the short i and u are really lengthened to é and á in Chanda's Prákrit, as in the instr., abl., gen. and loc. singular and nom. and acc. plural of feminine nouns, the change is expressly enjoined by Chanda, by sútra II, 4, where he gives the two examples buddhie, dhenúe (not buddhie, dhenue). (3). The acc. singular of feminine nouns in i and ú, as well as of feminine nouns in d, has a long termination ; thus gangám, naim, vahúm. The MSS., on the whole, are decisive on this point. For though C and D read gangan in 1, 3, B reads gangám (A omits it); on the other band C and D read naim in I, 3 (A B omit it). This is the more noteworthy, as not only the later Prákrit, but even Páli (see Minayef, pp. 64, 67, 70) have the short termination, so that, if the long termination in Chapda were due to the Revisionists, they would bave acted contrary to their usual instincts of conforming to the later Prakrit; and this strongly makes for the genuineness of the long terminations. The fact, that Chaņda enumerates them under . Perhaps no great stross can be laid on the fact that in M8. D the short i and u occur three times ; viz. buddhihim, guruhim in I, 3 and guruhinto in L, 8. They may be mere clerical errors.

·xxxviii INTRODUCTION. . sútra 1, 8, makes in the same direotion ; for if they had been short, they would have been too unlike Sanskrit to be noticed in that sútra. Another evidence in the same direction is the fact, that in sútra II, 16, where Chanda gives the declension of the noun gavt " cow", the two MSS. C D again read gávím in the acc. sing. (A B omit it); this carries all the more weight, as it is again an undesigned coincidence. Lastly there is another striking evidence, in the personal pronouns, which also preserve the Sanskritic long termination in their acc. sing. tvám or tám and mám (see remarks, p. xlvi). (4). All MSS. assign a locative singular in e to the nouns in i and u; thus aggie, gurue. That this is false, and rests on a misconception by the Re. visionists of the intention of sútra I, 14, I shall show afterwards in the Analysis of Chanqa's rules on nominal declension. Accordingly I have omitted these spurious forms. Masculines in i. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prákrit. Sing. Nom. मिः चम्गि बग्गी Voc.पने चम्गि पग्गि अगौ or चम्मि Acc. अग्निं ग्गिं अग्गिं पग्गिं Instr. अग्निना अग्गिना परिंगणा स्वमिगणा पग्गिमा पम्गिो ग्गियो चम्गिमा or oहा सम्मोहितो ADI. चम्गितो पग्गितो पग्नितो घनिमः अम्गीयो or पौष Gen. पम्गिमो 01 • चम्गिणे or "स मिणे or मिस Loo./पग्री चम्मिमि or बिचमिगम्मि पमिनिम अनया अम्गयो समायो चमोमो or पौष Plur.Non पग्गी पग्गी चम्गो Voc. पग्गियो चम्मिको Acc. पौन like nom. like nom. like nom. पम्मिमि or .पिम्मिyि or of Instr.) अनिभिः off or of ·INTRODUCTION. xxxix Case. Sanskrit. Pali Arsha. Prakrit. पग्गिभि or विपम्गिम्तिो Abl. अग्निभ्यः बम्गौभि cr.fr पगौरतो or •तो बग्गौणं or • Gen. नौमा बगौ or . बगीन अम्गौ or or (deest). Loc. | मिषु अग्गिनु or • पग्गिस पग्गी चम्मीत or Feminines in i. Case. Sangkrit. Pali. Arsha. Prákrit. बुडी Sing. Nom बुद्धिः Voc.बडे Ace. बुद्धि बुद्धि वडि दि पुद्धि or बुरी बुद्धि बुद्धि बुद्धि Instr.| बद्या Abl. बुद्धाः or Cri Gen. पुगैर or jऔर बुजोषा or jौष बनिया बुद्धौर (abl. loc. also बुधा, loc. बुद्धिय, बुा, बुद्धि, बुद्धो) Loc. Slut or Plur. Nom. बदौ बुडी वृदयः Voc. बुदियो पुखौ बुद्धौषो or बुद्धौ बुद्धीची or jौष Ace. बुद्धौर like nom. like nom. like nom. Instr. बुद्धिभिः ir or off Abl. बुरिभ्यः ॥ बुरिभि or on बुद्धिति or ft बुदौभि or • पजिमि or ifr बुरिरिलो पुनौमि or or पुऔर or • it or •r .See H.C.IV, 300.. Gen. पुरोना पुरोग गौरतो or dता बुधौ or . (deest)* ·l INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. बडित Loc. विष बुदित or बदौड or of .. Neuters in i. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prákrit. Sing. Nom. दधि Plur. do. | रौनि दधि दति (ace. दरिं) दhिor दKिor दर्षि (voc. only दक्षि) दौ or दधीनि दौनि or of दहीणि or दहौर or दहौर The remainder, like masculines in i. Case. Masculines in u. Páli. Arsha. Sanskrit. Prakrit. गुरु गुर | गुरु Sing. Nom. T: Voc. | मुरो Acc.गु गर गुरु or गुरु गर्व गर Instr. गुण . गाणा | गुरुणा गबणे गरो गुरुणे Abl. गुरुषितो गुवमा or न्हा गुरमो गुरुतो गुगलो गुरुयो or गुरूप Gen. गुरोः गुषणे गु गुरो Loa si गुरुषि or •नि गुमि मुरणे मुरवा गुको गरस गुरवि गुरयो or grator. Plur.Nom. Voo. बर मरतो गरो • Fire तुनो, Bom Minayet, p. 69. .

·INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit, Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. Instr. गवभिः गhि or of | गुरभि or oft * गुrि or •fk मुरुभि or . गुरभि or •हि गुरितो गुरुभि or .हि Abl. मतभ्यः गुरुहितो or तो गुरुर्ण or गुरूप deestt गहणं or गुरुण गुरू or गुहा Gen. गुरु गरह Loc.गुरुष गुनत or हुं गुरुत or K Feminines in u. Páli. Arsha. Case. Sanskrit. Prakrit. Sing. Nom. धेनुः बन Voc. धेना धन धेनु धेम धर्म घे or घेथू घेणं Acc. धेनुं घे Instr. धेन्वा Abl. 2 সমুহ घेणए or धेशूर घेणूचा or धेमन Loc. great or NWT Plur. Nom. धनू धेनू धेनवः धेशू धेनूचो or धेनूज घेणूचो or घेणा Voc. धेनुयो Acc.मः like nom. like nom. like nom. or of Abl. धेनुभ्यः धेमुभि or •ति धेनुहि or ift Instr. धेनुभिः धेनूमि घेणूहि or.oft धेनुभि or ofrधेमुहितो धेमूभि or of धेहितो or Qतो Gen. | धेनूनों धेनूएं or धेनूर भेपूर्व or प्रेसर धेनन धेमूर or धेनूर doortt Like wyfe, see Kuba, p. 82. See H. C. IV, 300.

·xlii INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prákrit. घेमा Loc. | धेनुष घेनुस or of घेमूह घेण्तु or K Neuters in u. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prákrit. Sing. Nom. | मष मष Is (acc. मई) मड or मडं or मई (voc. मड). Plur. do. मधूनि मधू or मधूनि महनि or ofण महणि or महई or महई The remainder, like masculines in U. Masculine nouns in i and ú are generally declined like those in i and u, excepting the nom. sing. which ends in í or ú respectively.* Feminine nouns in i and ú are declined like those in i and , excepting, of course, that they have long é and ú wherever the latter have short i and u. Feminines in i. Pali. Arsha. Case. Sanskrit. Prakrit. Sing. Nom. मदी मई मर Voc. मदि मदि मद नई Acc. भदौं नदिं or मदियं मई Plur. Instr. नदीमा भदौभि or .हि महिor Abl. मदोभ्या मदौभि or कि मस्तिो Loc. | नदोषु नदौर मईस or ०९ The remainder, as in feminines in i. मईहि or of भईहिंतो or •सुंतो লঃ or লন্ত Case. Feminines in ú. Páli. Arsha. Sanskrit. Prakrit. Sing. Nom. वधूः Voc. Acc. वर्ष Thus nani I, 24, sarf III, 18, savvarná in D III, 6.

·INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. Plur. Instr.aufa ayfa or oft Tify or of Taft or ofi Abl. od opefur or o वहरितो बषितो or •तो Loc. वधूष THE or on वधूत वह or सुं The remainder, as in feminines in w. The declension of the noun go « cow", The declension of this noun is given in sútra II, 16. It is not really an irregularly declined noun. The fact is, the Sanskrit word go is generis communis. The Vernaculars (Páli and Prákrit), however, þavo formed separate words for the two genders ; viz., gávo masc. and gúví fem. The declension of the latter is given in II, 16, and it is quite regular, like that of nai "river". Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha, Prákrit. Sing. Nom. (sit:) गावी. गावी arat or at Acc. (at) arfa गावीं गाई गावियो* गावौषी or ०७ Plur. Nom. गावौषोt or गारपी or गाई (hta:) Acc. गावी- गावी an The remainder, like feminines in é. 6, PRONOUNS. a, Personal Pronouns. The original forms of the base of this pronoun are # and 9 (= Sangkrit va), of which, in Sanskrit, the former belongs to the singular and the latter to the plural. In the Vernaculars (Páli, Prákrit), however, this distinction is not strictly observed. Moreover there are some by-forms of the base ; viz., mama, mayha, maha, majjha. The last two, which occur in the Arsha, are, probably, mere modifications of mayha which occurs in Pali • Gaol nom. sing. in Kuhn, p. 85, and gdviyo nom. plur. in Childers, p. 145, and gavr in Kachch. II, 1, 23 (Senart, p. 44). + Gáot in H. C. II, 174 and gal in H. C. I, 168 and gávio in H. O. II, 174.

·liv INTRODUCTION. and, in the form mahya, in Sanskrit. In the Arsha these by-forms occur only in a few isolated cases ; but in the later Prákrit they have a nearly regular declension. The Arsha, also, has an indeclinable form bhe, which may be used for any of the six cases (II, 27). Hemachandra (III, 106) allows it only in the plural. It is probably a modification of mhe, curtailed from amhe. Declension. Cases. Sanskrit. (Páli, Arsha. Prakrit. acc. आई or m Sing. Nom. चम्हि or चम्मि मां मां Acc. । मर्म ## or fax, etc. मया मया मर मर or मह Instr. मे or ममए, etc. मया मरतो मरतो All. ममतो or ममादो,etc. मत् । । । महनोor महादो,etc. मझनो or मझादो, [otc. मे, etc. मम मम or ममं मम मम Gen. मह or मई मम् मउभ मउभा or मठ - चन्ह or पद 'मयि मयि | मयि मर, etc. ममणि Loc. महम्मि || ।। मम्मानिस ·INTRODUCTION. xly Cuse. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prákrit. वयं मयं पर्य Plur. Nom. - को or or बरे (or न्हाक) or हो ore Acc. हो पyि or . Instr. अस्माभिः अन्दभि or हिचडि or . चन्दाहिor oft,etc. बदभि or बम्हहितो or (चरितो?)or सुतो पहाड़ितो or सुतो Abl. असत् (ममेहितो?)or •सुनो ममास्तिो or •संसो मो or अस्माकं असा or म्हाक बहाणं or •ण बहाएं or " बदाई or or Gen. । ममाणं or • महासं or . मम्भाणं or . चम्स बन्देस or K बन्देसु or इस ममेह or ममत Loc. महे or मात मझोत or मज्झत also पन्हात or सं. [etc. b, Second Personal Pronoun. The original bases of this pronoun are tva or ta and tumha (Sanskrit yushma). In Sanskrit they belong to the singular and plural respectively; but in the Vernaculars (Páli and Prákrit) the distinction is not striotly observed. There are, moreover, the following by.forms of the bowe :

·xlyi INTRODUCTION. N tu or tava or tuva or tuma and tuyha or tuha or tujjha or tubbha or tumbha. The first four are probably modifications of tva, and the others, of tumha. The Arsha possesses most of these by-forms, though they occur only in isolated cases ; absent are only tu, tuva, tuyha. In the later Prákrit, however, they are capable of almost regular declension. The Arsha possesses also an indeclinable form the which may be used in any of the six cases (II, 26). Hemachandra confines its use to the instrumental singular and to the nominative, accusative, instrumental and genitive plural (H. C. III, 94, 91, 93, 95, 100). The second personal pronoun in Chanda's Prákrit is especially deserving of notice, as some of its forms bear a striking witness to its antiquity. I moan the forms of the nom. acc. and loc. sing., which, just as in Páli, may optionally preserve the initial conjunct tv. The MSS. are on this point in considerable confusion, owing to the, perhaps, natural mistake of the Kovisionists, that these were the Sanskrit equivalents of the Prákrit forms. This can be very clearly shown in regard to the accusative case. The readings are the following: A at I Mill B त्यां। मां। सं। मं॥ Cati RITHI #l D सां। तं मां। मं॥ A has nearly preserved the original reading, as I shall presently show, The Revisionists, mistaking tvám and mám for Sanskrit, were naturally surprised to miss in A the corresponding form *i ; so they quietly added in B and C. Next noticing that these four forms did not observe their proper order, they change the latter to tván, tam, mám, mam in D. This no doubt is the correct order ; provided that tvám and mám are really Sanskrit. * But the truth is that they are not Sanskrit. Indeed, one of the indications that they aro not Sanskrit, is the very fact of the absence of that order in A B C. On the other hand, on the supposition that they are not Sanskrit, but Prákrit, it will at once appear that the reading of A does observe the proper order ; moreover it will also be seen, why A omits mam. The order of the forms of the nom. plural (vayan, tuhme, ahme) clearly shows Chanda's method. Vayan is a tatsama ; tuhme and ahme are tadbhavas; the tatsama form cor. responding to vayan is yuyam, but that does not exist in Prákrit. Chanda's inethod, evidently, is to give firstly the tatsama forms, afterwards the tadbhava. Applying this key to the explanation of accusative singular forms, • It is well known, that native Grammarians, whon treating of " persons" or " personal" pronouns do not commence, as we do, with the first person and then proceed to the second and third; but thoy bogin at the other end. Hence with them the second porsonal prononn always precedes the first. Hence the change in D to tvám tam, mam mango.

·INTRODUCTION. xlvii we find that tváy, mám is the tatsama pair ; the tadbhava pair should be tám, mám, but mám is not a tadbhava ; hence it is omitted in the socond pair, and the result is tvám, mám, tám. That túm must be the genuine reading is sufficiently clear from the above argument; if tam were the genuine reading, the omission of the corresponding form man would be unaccountable ; while if tám was the original reading, its change into tam by the frst Revi. sionist can be easily accounted for by his taking tvám for Sanskrit and tám for (what it undoubtedly would be in that case) an orroncous Prákrit spelling. But if tvám is a Prákrit tatsama, its immediate tadbhava is tám, not tam. And there is this to be said for the form tám, that it agrees with the general law of Chaņşa's Prákrit, of preserving the long termination in the acc. singular (see the remarks on p. xxxvii). Moreover if tam were the real form, it could hardly have been noticed by Chanda under sútra 1, 3, as it would be too unlike Sanskrit tvám to be fairly called a samskritavad vibhakti. It would, no doubt, have had a special sútra assigned to it; as indeed is done by the Revisionist authors of C D (in I, 20) who seem to have felt a little tho inconsistency of their changing tám into tam. It being thus established, that tvám is the tatsama form of the acc. singular, there is little difficulty in adjusting the forms of the nom. and loc. singular. The tatsama forms of the former are tvam, aham; the tadbhava is tam, which is not mentioned in sútra I, 3, but occurs incidentally in other sútras (e. g. in II, 18). The tatsama locativos are tvayi, mayi; the tadbhava is tayi. Thero are, of course, no tadbhava forms of aham and mayi. Declension Arsha. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Prakrit. or hi or Nom. ga तुम तुवं or तुम cant खं or # खां or at तं or तुं नवं or तुवं a. तुषं or तुम Acc. तुए or तुमे TUT agt or TOT 7 or 6 तर or तर Instr. or gå से or तुमे The or URG ·xlviii INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit.. वया or तया सरलो तरतो तुमातो तुमाहितो or of तुमत्तो or तुमालो तुमाहिंतो or हिं तुबत्तोorतुवाचो,etc. Abl. त्वत् ।। नोorसुहाचो,etc. तुमनोorतुभाचो,eto greatorgerit,etc. [etc. तुझतो or तुझायो सेorदेoदिor Corr Me ते तव तष तव तुव or तुम, etc. सुह or तु Gon. तुझ तुभ उभा तुन्द or उम्ब or तुम्हें तुभ or उन्म बयि त्वयि or तयित्वयि or सयि ar or UFH, etc. orশল্পিorমুন্সি Loc. तुभामिन | ।। तुमम्मि तुभम्मि or तुझे तुम् or तुम Plur. Nom. यूयं तुणे or जये || सुमेor तुम्भ ·INTRODUCTION. xlix Case. Sanskrit. Pali. Arsha. Prákrit. वः वो वो तुम्हे (or तुम्हाक) तुम्हे तुन्भे Acc. यष्याम् तुन्भे or तुम तुरहे or रहे ম Instr. चमाभिः J तुम्हेभि or •हि तुम्बेहि or हिं तुम्हेyि or एक (तुन्भेहि or हिं) तुन्भेoिr उन्भेरि तुरहे hिor ज्योति तुझोहिं तुम्हेरितो. or हुँतो* तुम्हेभि or •हि तुम्हेरितो तुम्हाडितो or •संतो gajo or gatt•,etc. तुरहे०or तुहा०*,etc. gmoorgjumito,etc. Abl. | युपत् यो तुम्हाणं or 'ए तुम्हाणं or m तुहाएं or •ए Gen. यस्माकं तुम्हा तुम्हाइं or •ह तुमाfor तुषाणं or तुम्भाणं or •ण तुखभाणं or तुन्द or तुम् तुम or तुन gee or gemi •Also रिता तो, नास्तिो or संसो, पहेरिसा or •तो, आयातितो or orat| ·INTRODUCTION. Case. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. तुम्हे तुम्हेसु or • Prákiit. Jūs or 5* går or UAE. सुवेत or तुबस . तुहेस or तुहरु तुन्भेस or तुन्भत The or you Loc. युवा b, Demonstrative Pronouns. These are tnd, etad and idam. Their declensional bases are ta, eta and ina respectively. They are regularly declined, like nouns in l. Of the regular forms of tad the following are mentioned by Chanda, nom. sing. neuter tar (II, 17); nom. plur. masc. te (I, 31); instr., abl., gen., loc. sing. fem. táe (I, 9); gen. plur. com. gen. táņam or táham (I, 5). Moreover the following irregular forms are noticed ; nom. sing. masc. sa (II, 17, Skr. 8a), fem. sú (II, 1, Skr. sá); abl. sing. fem. tassá (B C D, 1, 3, Skr. tasyah), gen. sing. or plur. com. gen, se (1, 17); gen. plur. masc, or neut. tesam (Skr. teshám) or tesim (1, 3); loc. sing. masc. or neut. tasmim (Skr. tasmin) or tamhi (B C D, 1,3). All these anomalous forms are relics from the Sanskrit, excepting the genitive se. They also. occur in Páli, excepting the genitive general se and the genitive plural tesim (see Minayef's Páli Grammar, pp. 83-85). There are also evidences of the existence of an irregular feminine base ti or tí; viz., instr., abl., gen., loc. sing. tie (I, 9) and abl. sing. tissá (B C D, 1, 3). Of the base eta, the only forms noticed are the Sanskritic nom. sing. masc. esa (II, 10) and the anomalous gen. general se (I, 17). Of the base ime, only the regular form imá of the nom. sing. fem. (II, 1) and the anomalous forn se of the genitive general (1, 17) are mentioned. c, Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. The bases are ja and ka, which are declined regularly, like nouns in a. There are only three forms, however, noticed in Chanda ; viz., the irregular Sanskritic abl, sing. masc. or neut. jamhá (III, 23) of the relative pronoun Alo , WATC GTC, to gang, gaya; also every forza with final or ·INTRODUCTION. li and the irregular Sanskritic nom. singular neuter kim (I, 23) and the regular gen: plural kánam or káham (II, 15) of the interrogative pronoun. d, Pronominal Adjectives. The pronouns of quantity are táva " so much”, jáva" as much" (II, 21), for Sanskrit távat, yávat, throwing off, as usual (see II, 11) the final con. sonant t. Besides táva there also occurs the anomalously shortened form tá (but not ja, for jáva). The Páli has only táva, jáva, but not tá (see Childers, .pp. 500, 599). The later Prákrit has both pairs complete, táva and jáva, tá and já (HI. C. I, 271). Páli has also a form jávarı (apparently really a nom. sing., like maham, bhavam); the Arsha probably bad both túvam and jávam ; at least they occur in the Jaina Prákrit of the Bhagavatí (100 Weber's Fragment, p. 257). There is also mentioned the interrogative pronominal adjective, nom. sing. masc., katare “which of two" (II, 10, Skr. katara”). . . 7, NUMERALS. The declension of the numerals is not noticed at all by Chanda, with the exception of the genitive plural, which ends in ņņam (I, 6). From this fact, however, it may be concluded, that, in all other respects, the declension of numerals was regular and followed that of nouns. That is to say, that eka "one", pancha "five", and all others, ending in a, were declined like nouns in a (e. g., deva); di "two" (Skr. dvi) and ti "three" (Skr. tri), like nouns in i (e. g., aggi); and chatu " four" (Skr. chatur), like nouns in u (e. g., guru). It is probable, however, that the nominative and accusative of the second and fourth numerals were taken directly from the Sanskrit ; viz., do or duve or ve (Skr. dvau, dve, Páli dve, duve, Prákrit do, duve, ve, donni, venni) “two"; chattáro (atc. also chaturo), chata880, chattári (so also in Páli ; Skr. chatváraḥ, chaturaḥ, chatasrah, chatvári ; Prák. vhattáro, chaüro, chattári) "four”. The following cardinal numerals are mentioned incidentally : 6. chha (III, 14), Skr. shat, Pá. chha, Prák. chha. 10. daha (III, 14), Skr. daşa, Pá. dasa, Pr. duse or ddha. 13. teraha (II1, 22, 31) Skr. Trayodaşa, Pá. teraha or telaha, Pr. teraha. 16. solasa (III, 21), Skr. shoqaşa, Pá. solusa, Pr. soluha (?) 20. vísa (III, 32), Skr. vimsati, Pá. visati or vísan, Pr. visá. 30. tísk (I, 6), Skr. trimsat, Pá. timsati or tisam, Pr. tisá. 50. panná (III, 32), Skr. pancháşat, Pá. paññásunn, Pr. paņņásá. 55. panapannasa (III, 33), Skr. panchapanchasat, Pá. punchapaññása, Pr. panapanna. The following numetals are also mentioned, viz. :- ·lii INTRODUCTION. 6th chhattho (III, 26), Skr, shashthaḥ, Pá. chhattho or saçțho (Kachch. p. 200), Pr. chhattho. "O fold" chhakkam (III, 3), Skr. shatkam, Pá. chhakkam, Pr. chhakkam. 8, TIE VERB. Chanda's Grammar takes no formal notice of the conjugation of the Verb. Incidentally, however, not a little information is supplied; and that shows that, on the whole, the conjugation did not differ much from its Sanskrit prototype, so far at least as the ordinary tenses are concerned. The difference does not appear to have been greater than that between the Páli and Sanskrit. The old Prákrit, like the Páli and Sanskrit, had parasmaipada and átmanepada forms; thus parasm. gachchhati" he goes" (II, 4); átm. najjate “it is known" (III, 25). These two examples also show the existence of the active and passive voices. The MSS. vary a good deal in their spelling (see the var. lect.).; sometimes all give the ending e of the átmanepada (e. g., vijjhate in III, 11); sometimes only one or the other (e. g., dísate in II, 5. najjate in III, 25), while the rest give the termination i of the parasmai pada. I have preferred restoring uniformly the átrnanepada ending, as it has undoubtedly the support of antiquity and because Chanda has no sútra to allow for the change of the átmanepada into the parasmaipada. That change became almost universal in lator Prúkrit; its beginnings are already to be found in Páli (Kachch. III, 4, 37. p. 263); and it may have occasionally occurred in the Arsha ; it certainly did occur in the Arsha in the present participle, where it is enjoined by an especial sútra (II, 25); but the absence of any such sútra with reference to the tenses seems to show that the change did not yet affect the latter. There was no dual, as sútra II, 12 shows. The examples are all taken from the noun ; but if the noun had no dual, the verb is not likely to have had it. With regard to the three persons, examples occur of all three, both in the singular and plural; but only in the present and imperative tenses. Thus present tense 1st sing. Thanámi (I, 20. 22), vemmi (III, 3); 2nd sing. si " thou art":(II, 18); 3rd sing. eti (1, 12), achchhati (II, 1), guchchhati (II, 4. 10), bháti (II, 22), hoti (III, 31), havati (III, 39); 1st plur. bhanámo (II, 27); 3rd plur. jalanti (I, 12). Again imperative tense, 2nd sing. passa" see thou" (1, 12), 3rd sing. rakkhatu (1, 3), 2nd plur. nisúmetha (II, 26), 3rd plur. rakkhantu (I, U). These examples also abow traces of the existence of verbal classes. Thus bhavati, jalanti (Skr. jualanti), eto, are of the Ist-class ; eli, bháti, vemmi ·INTRODUCTION. lif (Skr. vachmi) of the IInd class ; lijjante (Skr. liyante) is of the IVth class ; nisémetha (Skr. nişúmayata) of the Xth class. The passive may be formed in two ways, either by assimilating the suffix ya to the preceding consonant, or by changing it to jja if preceded by a vowel, or to ijja if preceded by a consonant (III, 25). Thus 3rd sing. pres. disato for Skr. drisyate" it is seen" (II, 5), dajjhate for Skr. dahyate " it is burnt" (III, 1); again najjate for Skr. jñciynte “it is known" (III, 25), váhijjato for Skr. vādhyate " he is troubled" (III, 25).* The causal is formed by means of the suffix è, as in the 2nd plur. imper. nisámetha for Skr. nişámayata. As to the participles, see the following section. Conjugation of bhan " speak". Present tense. Person. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. Sing. 1st | भामि भणामि भणामि भणामि or भणमि 2nd भणसि भणसि भपासि भणसि 3rd भणति भणति भणति भार भणामो or भणमो Plur. 1st भणामः भणाम मो भणाम or भएम, etc. 2nd | भणथ भाथ भण्थ भाइ or भणित्य 3rd | भनि भांति भांति. भांति Imperative. भण Sing. 2nd | भण भण 3rd भणतु भणतु भणतु भाउ Plur.2nd भणत भणथ भणथ भणह 3rd भणम् भणंतु भणंतु भर्णत Passive. भचने भसते भसर or भस Sing. 3rd | भण्यते भणीयते भणौपए or पर भनिने भणिनए or जर • MS. A in II, 25 has the curious reading sahiyyantam (see Appendix), which raises a doubt, whether yy may not possibly be the correct roading throughout for ö; the lattor being due to the Revisionists. The reading yy would well agree with sútra III, 25 (nayyate, váhiyyate); though, no doubt, sútra III, 16 may account for the change of yy to jj.

·"liv INTRODUCTION. Causal. Person. Sanskrit. Páli. Arsha. Prakrit. भाणेति भाणेति Sing. 3rd wayfar भार भशायर भणापति (uprafar) The following specialities may be noticed : the root hava “ be” may be optionally contracted to ho; e. g., hoti" it is" (III, 31); 80 also in Páli (sco Minayef, p. 113). Again the root as“ be" drops its initial a in the 2nd pers. sing. si " thou art” (II, 18). The roots grah "take" and kar “do" pass from the IXth and Vth classes respectively into the VIth class, ginhati ." he takes” (III, 23), karati" ho does” (see App. B C D, III, 3). 9, SUFFIXES. a, Participial. etc. : a, anta (Skr. at) forms the participle present of the parasmaipada verbs and optionally of the átmanepada. Thus arahanto (II, 11) for Skr. arhan ; pass. bhijjantam (11,.25) for Skr. bhidyamáram. b, mána forms optionally the participle present of the átmanepada verbs ; 8. 8., sáhijjaménain (App. A, II, 25) for Skr. sádhyamánam. 0, ta forms the participle past of the passive ; e. g., katum (Skr. krtam, I, 23), sutam (Skr. şrutam, III, 2), palútam (Skr. paláyitam, I, 23), After consonants it inserts i or is assimilated : thus osaritam (Skr. apasaritan, II, 23), dittham (Skr. dộrshtann, I, 27). d, tavva (Skr. tavya) forms the participle future passive. Thus sotavvam (Skr. srotavyam, III, 2), kátavvam (Skr. kartavyam, II, 4. III, 9, 29). e, ttá or ttu (Skr. tvá) form the conjunctive participle. Thus bhottum (Skr. bhuktvá, II, 19, final anusvára by II, 15), or, with connecting vowel i, vandittá and vandittu (Skr. vanditvá, II, 19). Sometimes tvá forms chchá and thus by assimilation ; e. g., suchchá (Skr, şrutvá, II, 19); kațţu (Skr. krtvá, II, 19); or even ppi, as in kappi (Skr krtvá, II, 19, cf. gappi of gam in the Apabbramşa, H, C. IV, 442). f, o (or rather io) may form the conjunctive participle ; e. g., vandio (Skr. vanditvá, II, 19).* • I suspect that there is hero some corruption in the text. The suffix is perhaps iya (88 in Pali). MS. A reads the example vandiva (not vandio); similarly A reads iva in II, 38, where undoubtedly the correct reading is iya. Hence the correct reading in II, 19 may be vandiya, and accordingly the suffix iya (not o).

·INTRODUCTION. 1, g, túna or ttúrn (Skr. tvána) forms the conjunctive participle ; e. 8., bhottúna (Skr. Bhuktvá, II, 19), kútúra (Skr. krtva, II, 5). b, Nominal. ála and illa derive nouns espressive of possession. Thus jadálo or jadil (Skr. jațaván) II, 20. 22); 10, INDECLINABLES. a, naï, cheya or chiya (Skr. eva) express emphasis (IT, 17). After short vowels ch is doubled ; thus tam cheya, but sa chchiya. b, piva, viva, viya, vva, va (Skr. iva) express likeness (IT, thus gimho viya, kamalam viva ; but piva apparently cannot be used after a vowel, but only after an anusvára, o. g, chandanam piva (cf. pi). The Sanskrit form iva also occurs, e. g., chamaram ivan c, jahá (Skr. yathá) also expresses likeness (II, 22); e. g., jahá sankho. d, pi (Skr. api) expresses addition or emphasis ([I, 18), thus katam pi, súro pi. e, khu (Skr. khalu) expresses emphasis (II, 24); thus evan khu. f, tá or táva (Skr. túvat) and jáva (Skr. yávat) express measure (II, . 21); e. g., tá vichchhinnam, túva gambhíró, jáva lijjante. The abbreviated form já does not occur. See pronominal adjectives, p. li. g, iya (Skr. iti) indicatos a quotation (II, 28); e. g., iya evanı. h, o (Skr. ava or apa) is a prefix (II, 23); e. g., ohasitum (Skr. avahasi. tam), osaritam (Skr. apasaritam). ANALYSIS OF CHAŅDA'S SUTRAS ON NOMINAL DECLENSION, I, 3. 5-10.* The plan on wbich these sútras are arranged is to notice first all those declensional forms which are like the corresponding forms in Sanskrit, though modified in accordance with the general phonetio laws of Prákrit. These forms are enumerated in sútra I, 3. Secondly, all those forms which are peculiar to Prákrit and are not merely phonetically modified Sanskritic forms are enumerated in the sűtras I, 5–16. The following table will show at a glance this cardinal division of the Prakrit declensional forms: : • A brief analysis of the second and third chapters of Chanda has already been given; see pp. vi-, --XXX.

·isi INTRODUCTION. masc, a bases. masc. i, u bases. fem. a, i, u bases. Sansk. Prák. Sansk. Prák. Sansk. Prák.' Sing. Nom. Nom. Nom. Acc. Acc. Acc. Instr. Instr. Instr. ABL. Abl. Abl. GEN. GEN. Gen. Loc. Loc. Loc. Plur. Nom. Nom. Nom. ACC. Acc. Acc. INSTR. Instr. 1 INSTR. Instr, } INSTR. ) . ABL. ABL. ABL. Gon. GEN. I Gon. ) GEN.) Gen. 1 GEN. I Loc. Loc. Loc. The forms in the Sanskrit columns are those which Prákrit shares with the Sanskrit; those in the Prákrit columns are the forms peculiar to Prákrit. Now it will be observed (1) that in the Prákrit columns the only forms which are wholly alike for all three kinds of bases (in a, i, u) and for all three genders are those of the instrumental, ablative and genitive plural ; indicated by capital italics. (2). The only forms which are wholly alike for all three kinds of bases in the feminine gender are those of the instr., abl., gen., loc. singular and the nom. acc. plural indicated by small italics. (In the other genders, the same forms are not alike for the three kinds of bases.) (3). The only forms, wbich are wholly alike for the bases in i and u in the masculine gender are those of the abl. sing. and nom. and acc. plural; indicated by ordinary type. (4). The only forms which are partially alike for all three kinds of bases in the masculino gender are those of the genitive and locative singular ; indicated by small çapitals, (In the gen. sing. the suffix 88a, and in the ·INTRODUCTION. lyii loc. sing. thu suffix mmi, are common to all buses in a, i, u, while the sutlis ro of the gen. is confined to bascs in i and 4, and the suffix e of the loc. to bases in a.) (5). The only forms which are peculiar to the bases in a in the masouline gender are those of the abl. sing. and the uco. plural ; indicated by largo capitals. This is the converse of No. 3.) The principle in the above explained order is to proccod from tho most general to the most particular forms. It will bo soon at once that it is this principle on which the sútras I, 5—16 arranged. We have first (by No. 1) sútras on the instr., abl. and gen. plural of all genders (lingiit parasya , 1, 5–8); secondly (by No. 2) sútras on the instr., abl., gen. and loc. sing., and the nom. and acc. plural of the feminino (striyum, I, 9, 10). Thirdly (by No. 3) sútras on the abl. sing. and nom. acc. plural of the masculino (pumsi, I, 11, 12). Fourthly (by No. 4) sútras on the gen. and the loc. singular of masculines (pumsi, I, 13, 14). Lastly (by No. 5) sútras on the abl. sing. and acc. plur. of the masculine (pumlinge, I, 15, 16). The arrangement of the several sútras within each of these five minor divisions is regulated by mere considerations of convenience or grainmatical usage. Thus in the first subdivision, Chanda commences with the sútra on the gen. plur., because the gen. plur. has two forins for all three kinds of base: (in a, i, u), one of which it has in coinion with Sanskrit (see Sanskrit column). This is indicated by the fraction. The gen. plur., thereforo, is the natural link between the Sanskritic cases, treated in sútra 1, 3, and the Prákritic cases, treated afterwards. Next follows the sútra on the instr. plur., because this case has its forın in common with Sanskrit, with the exception of masc. bases in a.* Litstly coines the sútra on the abl. plural * The treatment of this case requires a word of explanation. The fact is, that Chaņda was here met by an awkward dilemma. Tho Prákrit instr. plur. suffix hi is really the samo as the Skr. bhis (or bhiḥ), from which it is modifind by the general phonetic laws of Prákrit (i. e., by the rules III, 13. II, 10, 11). Accordingly there would have been no noed of any special sútra (I, 7), teaching the forination of tho Prák. instr. plur., if only Sanskrit had used the suffix this with every kind of baso ; but unfortunately Sanskrit does not use bhis, but ais, with masc. bases in a. It, thereforo, became necessary for Chaņda to formulato a special sútra to meet the exceptional case of these masc. a-busos. Hore came the dilemma. If he had made a spocial sútra (after the analogy of I, 16, 18) for masc. a-bases alone (say, hi bhiso'taḥ), this, by its torms, would huve denied the suffix hi to all other bases ; which would have been manifestly wrong. If, on the other hand, he made a special sútra for all bases, this would soem to imply that the suffix hi is altogether Prákritic (like the abl plur. suffix hinto I, 8), whereas it is really a Sanskritic suffix (samokritavad vibhaktı) and ought to be set down under sútra I, 3. In order to escape this dilemma, what Chaņķa did, was this : in order to indicate the Sanskritic character of the suffix hi, he mentioned it under sútra I, 3, but excluded ·lviii INTRODUCTION. which has nothing in common with Sanskrit. Again in the third subdivision Chanda commences with the sútra on the nom. and acc. plural, instead of that on the abl. singular, simply because the sútra (I, 10) wbich immediately precedes it referred to the nom. and acc. plur. ; a circumstance which saves the repetition of the term jaşşasoħ. Lastly in the fifth subdivision, Chanặa places the acc. plur. before the abl. sing., because the usage of native grammarians is to treat of the accusative (or second case), whether plural or singular, before the ablative (or fifth case); though another reason may have been, that sútras I, 15 and I, 16 on the a-bases are parallel to the sútras I, 11 and I, 12 on the i- and u-bases. There is a technical point of some difficulty with regard to these sútras. That the sútras I, 5-10 refer to any of the three kind of bases (in a, i, u) is shown by the absence of any limitation in their torms as well as in some of them) by their examples. But sútras I, 11, 12 are, as far as their terms are concerned, cqually unlimited; yet they are only applicable to bases in i and 26. How is this to be known? The limitation is ingeniously indicated in two ways; 1, by the examples ; these are only taken from bases in i and u ; the example of the a-base will be found in sútra I, 3; thus indicating, that the a-base forms its nom. plur. not by the rule I, 11, but by the rule I, 3. Secondly, there is the special sútra I, 15, which by its very existence limits the sphere of sútra I, 11 and shows that the a-base forms its acc. plur. not by the rule I, 11 but by the rule I, 15. The sútrami, 11 being thus limited to the i- and u bases, the sútra I, 12, of course, is equally limited to those bases by the well-known grammatical usage of vartanam or " implication."* Moreover the same implication is carried on to sútras I, 13, 14, till it is probibited by the introduction of the term ataḥ "after a-bases” in sútra I, 15. At the same time, the two sútras I, 13 and I, 14 are only partially applicable to bases in i and w; for they partially refer also to bases in a. How is amples of maso. a-bases ; next to meet tho exceptional case of the latter bases, he formu. lated a special sútra (I, 7) in general torms (hi bhisah), but excluded examples of any baso save those of masc. a-bases. In either case, therefore, he uses the examples which he gives to define the exact range of the terms of tho sútra. This device, to use examples to define the, otherwise misloading, tering of a sútra, is a favorite one with Chanda. Another striking example (regarding the gen. and loc sing.) will be noticed further on in the toxt. 1. The limitation of sútra I, 12 is also indicatod by the existence of sútra I, 16. In fact, there are two sets of sútras, vico, I, 11, 12 and I, 16, 16, both being on the acc. plur. and abl. sing. Of these the latter set, viz. I, 15, 16, being limited, by its very terms, to a-basan, shows that the former set must be limited to bases in i and u. There are, thas two sútras I, 11, N referring to bases in i and u only; next two sútras I, 13, 14 referring, partially, to both a-baseto and se and -bases; lastly two sútras I, 15, 16 referring to a-babes only. :

·INTRODUCTION. lix 66 this again to be known? The reply is the same as before ; by the examples. In kútra I, 13 the examples of the i. and x-bases give two forms of the genitive, but that of the a-base gives only one form, thus indicating that the a-base does not form a genitive in no, but only one in 880. Similarly in sútra 1, 14 the examples of the i- and 2-bases give only one form of the locativo each, while the examples of the a.base give two forms; thus showing that tho loc. in e does not belong to the i- and u-bases, but only to the a-base. * It hardly needs adding, that in sútra I, 16, of course, the term ataḥ is ngain "implied" from the preceding sútra ; though its limitation to the a-bases is also clearly shown by the suffix át (instead of nasi) used in the sútra. To return to the Sanskrit columns; they contain the residuo of the forms, which are not noticed in the Prákrit columns, and which are snmskṣitavad,". that is, the same as in Sanskrit, excepting that they arc modified by the ordinary Prákrit phonctic laws (II, 1, 4, 10, 11). These forms aro :-- (1.) The nom, and acc. singular of all three kinds of bases (in a, i, x) and of all three genders ; thus Skr. nom. sing grámaḥ, Ar. gámao (II, 10) gámo (11, 1; CF. Kachch. II, 1, 32. p. 48); or Skr. pitham, &r. półha + am = pidhan (II, 1 ; cf. Páņini VII, 1. 24. in Laghu Kaumudí, p. 83) or Skr. agniḥ, A'r, aggi (II, 10); or Skr. dadhi, Ar. dahi (II, 10; cf. l'aņini VII, 1. 23. in L. K. p. 85); or Skr. nadi, Ar. uni; or Skr. raidhúḥ, Ar. vahú (II, 10). Acc. sing. Skr. grámam, Ar. gáma-am = gúmam (I1,1; cf. Púņini VI, 1, 107 in L. K. p. 47); or Skr. agninn, Ar. aggi+an = aggim (cf. Páņini ibid.) ; or Skr. gangám, Ar. gangám; or Skr. nadím, Ar. naim, etc. (2.) The nom. plural of masculine and neuter bases in a ; thus Skr, deváḥ, Ar. devá (II, 10); or Skr. kulúni, Ar. kuláni or kulúni (111, 16). * There can be no doubt that the forms aggie, gurue (or aggle, gurúe sic) arv nothing but clumsy inventions of the thoughtless Revisionists, who mistook the intention of the sútra. For the forms have no support oititr from Páli or from Prákrit; indecu Ilomachandra and Vararuchi expressly forbid thom in their rulos (11. C. III, 128. Vr. VI, 61), which would almost seem to have had in view theso furgeries of tho Revisionists. Of. course, the forms aggie, gurue aro simply the rogulur Prákrit forms for the Sunskrit locatives agnike, guruke, containing the pleonastic suffix ka. Nor can it be doubtful that the example devassa sohá is only by some mischance omitted in MSS. A and B. For the gen, sing. of a-bases is not mentioned in 1, 3 (by any of the four M88.) whero pne might expect it, as it is a Sanskritic forin ; and if it were also omitted in I, 13, thoro would be no notice of it in the grammar at all. That, in such an important form us the gen. sing. of a-bases in ea, would be simply incredible. Hence the rouding of DISS. C D, in this respect, must be correct. But the stupid remark chakdrayrahanut, etc., of course, is altogether the Revisionists' own contribution. It was their way of solving the difficulty which I have explained in the text. Thoy either did not understand Chapda's method, or thought it not explicit enough. But their solution nakus it no bettor, involving as it does a most fanciful use of the term cha.

·ix INTRODUCTION. suffix air, (8.) The instr. singular of masc. and neuter bases in a; thus Skr. devena, Ar. devena (III, 16). (4.) The instr. plural of all bases in i and u and of all three genders ; thus Skr. agnibhiḥ, Ar. aggihi (II, 10. III, 13), or Skr. nadibhih, Ar. narhi, etc. The Skr. suffix bhiḥ drops its visarga by II, 10 and changes bh'to h by III, 13. The Arsha form, therefore, is perfectly regular ; but as the a-bases also take hi (for Skr. aih), it is given as the general sufix of the instr. plur. in I, 7. See the footnote on page lvii. (5.) The gen. plural for all three kinds of bases (in a, i, u) and for all three genders ; thus Skr. grámánám, A'r. gáma + nam = gámáņamı (I, 5. II 1; cf. Páņini VI, 4. 3. and VII, 1. 54 in L. K. p. 51. ; i. e., Skr. nám becomes iņam by I, 5; but nam consists of the augment ņ and the rcal suffix am, and the final vowel of the base gáma becomes long á before the initial vowel of the by II, 1). (6.) The loc. plur. of all three kinds of bases (in a, i, u) and of all three genders ; thus Skr. deveshu, Ar. deva-84 = devesu (cf. Pánini VII, 3, 103 in L. K. p. -50), or Skr. agnishu, Ar. aggisu (III, 18), or Skr. nadishu, Ar. naisu, etc. It will be observed, that these forms are precisely those wbich are enu. merated by Chanda in sútra 1, 3. In MS. B a few additional forms are given in sútra I, 3, which, however, do not materially affect the above given explanation. They occur in the acc. plur., and abl. gen. and loc. singular. They may possibly bo original portions of the sútra, as some of the pronominal forms are very old tatsamas (tasmin, tvayi, etc.). In any case they are, on the whole, correct additions, probably of very early date. But gangi, tumhe and amhe in the acc. plur. and game, kule in the loc. sing. are not quite in keeping with the spirit of the sútra, as the former forms come under sútra I, 10, 15, the latter under sútra I, 14. For this reason and because the standard MS. A omits them, I have relegated all these additions to the Appendix B C D. ON THE CHANGE OF DENTAL N TO CEREBRAL Ņ. PostSCRIPT to pp. XXV, xxvi. The only instances in which the Arsha shows an almost aniform use of the cerebral », independent of any influence of a preceding cerebral sound, are suffixes and particles. Thus there are the declensional suffixes na or ná of the instr. sing. (1,3), no of the abl. gen. sing. and nom. acc. plur. (I, 11, 12), și of the nom. plur., neut. (1, 4), na (or nam) of the gen. plur. (I, 6). Again tlie derivative suffixes túra (II, 19) of the conjunctive participle, and ·INTRODUCTION. Ixt ttaña (II, 29) of abstraction. Again the particle naï (II, 17, but never the negative na). In all these cases Sanskrit, whenever it bas a correspondmg form, uses the dental n. In the case of basos of nouns or verbs, the tendency of the Arsha is just thë other way. Here the dental n is almost uniforinly used; there are exceptions in which the cerebral ? occurs, independent of any influence of a preceding cerebral sound; but there is no apparent principle in theso excep. tions ; for the same word is at one timo spelled with dental n, at another, with cerebral ņ; e. g. náram (III, 6), but núnan, (III, 19); dhannar (B OD, III, 27), but dhannam (III, 16). Even as regards suffixes and particles, there is no absoluto uniformity of spelling with cerebral ạ. Especially is this want of perfect unifornity striking in MS. B. Thus it has instr. sing. devena in 1, 3, nehena in II, 27 ; nom. plur. kuluni in I, 3 (but deviņi in I, 4); gen. plur. devinam in I, 3 (but buddhiņam, naiņam, etc.) and no in the sútra of I, 5 (but ņa in all examples) ; ttana in II, 29 (in the comment, but ttana in the sútra and in all examples); nuż in 11, 17 (in the sútra, but naï in the comment, and in all examples). There are only three cases in which MS. B has uniformly the cerebral n ; viz., in the instr. sing. suffix ná (1,3), the abl. gen. sing. and nom. acc. plur. suffix mo (1, 11, 12), and in the derivativo suflix túņa (li, is). In the MS. Aº there are only two instances of want of uniformity ; viz., the nom. plur. kuláni in 1, 3 (but deváại in I, 4), and naï in II, 17 (only in the sútra). In most cases, probably, this want of uniformity is to be ascribed to the carelessness of the writers or copyists of the MSS. But in the case of the nom. plur. neuter (where both MSS. A and B agree) and, probably, of the instr. sing. of a-bases (which MS. B uniformly spells with dental n), I am inclined to believe that both ways of spelling (with n or ņ) are correct. It will be noticed that in these two cases the Arsha forins are tatsainas, while in the others they are, more or less, decided tadbhavas. This would account for the change of the dental n into the cerebral n being more firmly established in the latter than the former cases; in the case of the instr. sing. suffix ņá, the tendency to that change has even prevailed over the tatsama character of the suffix. That there was such a tendency to the preferential use of the cerebral ņ in Prákrit (at least in the Western Prákrit), there can be no doubt ; evidence of it, in the modern Western Gaudian, can still be observed. And that it assumed somewhat larger dimensions in later Prákrit times, is. clearly shown by the statements of Hemachandra in bis Grammar (already referred to on p. Ixvi). But there can be no doubt that, in the main, this tendency affected tadbbava forms and words only, and that in the living language, the vernacular Prákrit, it never assumed those large and uniform. .

·Ixii INTRODUCTION. rationem dimensions, which are taught in the Grammars of Vararuchi and others, and are exhibited in the dramatic and other non-Jaina literature. The state of the modern Western Vernaculars of India renders it doubtful whether, even in the far more limited dimensions taught by Hemachandra, the tendency ever existed in the vernacular Prákrit. That, as soon as the vernacular Prákrit was used for literary purposes, any such tendency should become slightly more accentuated, by being subjected to uniform rules, is but natural and a phenomenon attending the literary 'cultivation of all languages. But that exaggeration of it, which characterises the non-Jaina grammars and literaturo of Prákrit, is clearly the outgrowth of a scholastic pedantry and a mark of utter artificialness. In my opinion, the so-called Jaina Prákrit and the 80-called Máháráshţrí Prákrit merely differ in so far as that the former is the natural, the latter the artificial literary representative of the vernacular Western Prákrit. The Jain community, always very strong in Western India, employed their vernacular as the language of their sacred writings; and the literary language, thus formed, naturally kept more or less close to its vernacular prototype ;, for otherwise it would have defeated its own object of serving as the vehicle of conveying religious instruction to the masses. The Brabmanical opponents of the Jains, who had no feed to be guided by any such considerwell wud employed the Sanskrit language for their religious and all higher literature, condescended to employ the literary Prákrit, created by the Jains, only for purposes of secular literature of a lower class (erotic and dramatio poetry, etc.) and, in doing so, subjected the language to a high degree of pedantic artificialization. There are other evidences, making in the same direction, which however I can Lere only briefly refer to, as the subject is not strictly within the scope of the present work. One is the so-called ya-şruti, mentioned on p. vii. In Prákrit there is a tendency to elide medial single consonants. There is no difficulty in pronouncing the resultant biatus, when the latter of the two meeting vowels is i or w; for then the vowels practically tend to combine (a +i = ai or ay, a +u = o or au, etc.). But if the second vowel is a, there is some awkwardness in pronouncing the hiatus, especially if both vowels are a (d + a or a d, etc.). Hence a tendency arose in the vernacular Prákrit to overcome the awkwardness by sounding the semivowel y (or sometimes v) between the hiatus-vowels (aya = a + a, iya = i +a, wya or uva = x + a, etc.); a tendenoy the operation of which explains the origin of many modern Gaudian forms and which is still observable in the present day. When, how. ever, the vernacular Prákrit came to be cultivated by the Jains, another tendency, apparently, arose, of looking upon the ya-şruti as a vulgar practice and of reducing its use within narrower limits. Hence Hemachandra, in bis Grammar of the Jains Prákrity allows the yu-şruti only in the more difficult - ·INTRODUCTION. Ixiii case of the hiatus between two a (H. C. I, 101). The non-Jain cultivators of Prákrit (6 g., Vararuchi in his Grammar of the Dúbáráshtrí Průkrit) went & step further in the artificialization of the language and prohibited, or at least. ignored, the use of the ya-şruti altogether, ovidontly thinking that the admission of it would stultify the paramount Prákrit rule of eliding medial consonants and thus creating biatuses. Another evidence is the curious rule of Chanda (II, 2), that the first of two hiatus.rowels is elided, if the second is followed by a conjunct consonant.* Hence arise such words as devindo for devendo, kuujjoo for kotojjoo. This rule is utterly ignored by the grammarians of the later literary Prákrit, both the Jaina and the Mábáráshtrí. Nevertheless it is a rulo which must have been always observed in the vernacular Prúkrit, for it is still observed in the present day (e.g., in Hindi jogindu, narinda, as well as jogenda and narenda). The reason of its being ignored in the later literary Prákrit was probably this. In the later Prákrit a tendency arose to change i and u to e and o respectively before conjunct consonants (see Vr. I, 12, 20. H. C. 1, 85, 116); a practice apparently unknown to the older Prákrit of Chaņda. The result of this tendency would have been to produce alternative forms (devinda and devenda ; kaujjoo and kaojjoo); of these forms those with e and o (ilevenda and kaojjoo) resemble their Sanskrit equivalents (devendra, kritodyoga) much more nearly than the others with i and 1. Hence the latter forms, together with the rule which produced them, came evidently to be looked upon as vulgarities and accordingly as things to be avoided. But that is an incorrect view; and that the forms with i and u are the older of the two (those with a ando being in fact, in many cases, modifications of the older forms in i and w, and not direct derivatives of their Sanskrit counterparts) is proved by the practice of the modern Vernaculars, in which both forms often occur side by sido. ON THE TREATMENT OF MEDIAL SINGLE CONSONANTS. POSTSCRIPT TO pp. xxvi and 'xxviii. The remark as to the permissive character of Chanda's rules, of course, also applies to bis rule III, 34. It is not to be supposed that in the Prákrit of Chanda's time the sonant consonants were uniformly elided, any more than that the surds were uniformly preserved. But just as the latter were occasionally softened to the corresponding sonants (see Ch. III, 12), so the former were occasionally retained. But I think the existence of the rule III, 85 (on the ya-sruti), which provides for the treatment of a particular • The rule, apparently, only applies to compound words, as shown by the examplos, ·lxiv INTRODITION. hund of britis, buits that chats 31101-4 base loon villicitly common to do that inte; im since hall se'n could only ann4 by the chon of onut Odorants, it is clear that the chujon Hats it common occurence I coudude therefore, that in the Phnt of (and's one, ils parla sorrid 100) Sants, pornon las the regular practice, bule ns. read onants, Sio With them, m both cases, there might be exceptions; but (handia's gume, cloudy, was formulated to its to sit the generality of phenomena, Beynlig traptional or los gual penomena to be provided for by the "I'll carctor of Business Tline is the point of 1 l has followed a chitung und, where hew!',!lus Grammar. It may be added Ibu pules like ('l, m, 3! 11, 21, 21, also promi 10 arter tekney toids de notion on the past of the hand, the one that is in connotants .

·॥ श्रीगणेशाय नमः २ ॥ प्रणम्य शिरमा वौरं स्वपैर व्यापिभिर अक्षर्गः । नक्षा प्राकृत वक्ष्ये किंचिद् वृद्धमताद् अहं ॥ १ ॥ क्वचिन्न नापः क्वचित मन्धिः क्वचिद वर्मविपर्ययः । प्रागमाऽन्तादिमध्येषु लन्यं स्यात तत् तु भाषितं ॥ २ ॥ ॥ अथ क्रमेण नवनवतिः सत्राणि ॥ ३० प्रामद्धं प्राकृत (२१) जन्न हातात कि + (व्यापिभिर पाहत। मंस्कृतं देण्यादिकम् अनेकधा ॥ || ( यज्ञः यजन । एलिगे। या 6 जजः) । हजथाना रनखा: विमर्जनौ यस्य (ii, 10 जनना) विशेषः स्याद् वा यक्षिम्यन्दनप्र D (P) C'prenses En of the Juin work fulziral pref ६०-30. (२) ( नमः आगमोऽन्तादिमशेष लक्ष्यः स्यात (4) So A; B C D om. t| commentary. (६) B om. D, A B C योनिः ॥ (११ जा॥ (१३) A Bom. 1 ·॥ विभकिविधान प्रथमं॥ [I, 2.3 (१)संस्कृतसम । तच चेदं । सूरो। सामा। जालार)। कंदल) कोमल(४) । इत्यादि ॥ देशीप्रसिद्ध (५) (C D(१))। तर चेदं ॥ हर्षिः सं) लहमि। (2) स्पष्टं चन्द्रिकोज्वलितं (८)पुढे चन्द्रिकान्जलीय । इत्यादि ॥ ॥2॥ लिंगं चर) ॥२॥ प्राकृते लिंगम् अपि वेधा(१०) त्रिप्रकार(११) भवति ॥ देव(१) । गंगा(१९) । कुलं॥ ॥ 3 ॥ तस्मात् संस्कृतवद विभकयः ॥ ३ ॥ तस्मात् लियगत परा, संस्कृडवार विभायो(१४) भवंति॥ मि वह(२०)। 4 । - देवो)। खराणां खने 6 अगिः)। स्तो भगौ॥ ॥ . ॥ B॥ (8) A B कोमल ted here, that A B not: of a clause or sentence.. have a different reading; पुदं चरिकोषदुखौ। (२) (१२) D adds Skr. देवा । om. this case-term and CD add the एष। पौठरवि (104ODE ·I, 3.] ॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथम॥ ॥ रहि । मह । (९) । अहीर) ॥ जम् ॥ देवा(२)। कुलानि)। वयं(५) हो अहो । (CD) | अम् ॥ देवं । अग्गिं । मुस) । (गंगा । बुद्धिाः) । धेनुं । मई)। पौढ(१९) । दहिं । मई। (खा मां तो रक्खतु(१२) ॥ शाम् ४) ( B C D) ॥ टा ॥ देवेण(२५) । गुरुणा(१९) । दहिणा(१०) ॥ भिम् ॥ अग्गिहि(१८) । रिपुहिए)। बुद्धिहिर)। नईहिर९) । दहिहिं। महहिं(२२) । तुम्हेहि(२९) । अन्हे हिं। २२) ॥ डांम २५. (B C D ) ॥ भ्यम्(२५, (C D) ॥ उमा २५) ( B C D) ॥ श्राम ॥ देवाण(२५) । बुद्धौर्ण(२९) । धेनूण(२०) । मईणं(२८) । तेसं २८) तेसि(९) ॥ डिः ५५ •c गंगं गंगां। खरोऽन्योऽन्यस्य (ii, 4) इत्योम गंगे ॥ + C धेनु । (धेनु-चम्)। सरार्श. (ii, 1 घेन्-चम् or धनम् )। खरा. (ii, 4 धेनुम्) । पदरागमो• (ii, 11 घे)। 10 गुमाभिः । गुयादा यस्य सः (iii, 17 तुष्माभिः)। रमाशं सः (iii, 18 तुमाभिः) । वर्ग (iii, 3 तुमाभिः)। शहोर (iii, 28 तुन्हाभिः)। खरो. (i, 4 तुम्वेभिः)। पदावोस (ii, 11 तुम्हेभि)। किं भिसः (i, 7) तुम्बेहिं॥ C सिं। मेषां । रमा म: (ii, 18 मेसी) । खरोऽन्योऽन्यस्य (i, 4) रत्यनेन पाम् इति सिं भवति। सिं॥ " - , . (१) So A (see Kacc. ii, 2, 21), B तुमम. C D तुमं ॥ (२) Da andatter it, adds त्यादि ॥ (१) A देवाः, B देवः (cf. p. 2, note १३). (४) CD pale (e) B बयं; C D have a different reading, see Appendix CD. () A rela confusedly बुद्धिं । जस्। धेनं । पौठं। मऊं । वां। मां में रक्षो, om. the rest of the examples of the acc. sing. ; C D add the 8kr. translations पनि । गुर। गंगा । बुडिं। धेनौ। मह्रौं । पौढं। दधि । मधु॥ (6) C D add fry रिवं WORMS. fr# (5) So R; CD fais (e) B D gfon (•) ODT, A (११) A B पौठं॥ (१) A reads aा मांतर., BC मा संरभD हाँ मर.॥ (१२) A B रक्षो. C D रमब(१७) A om. ; see App. BODY १५) B देवेम, C D add Skr. ऐन । गुवहा। दशा (१९) B C D add ws ७) Dadds हरिण ॥ (१८) ABCD भौति (१६) रिबि, D रिxि Bom. ixample ; A om. this and the remaining examples of the instr. plur: OD 48 Skr. translations अनिभिः। रिपुभिः । बुजिनीमिपिमिम माभिः । (१०) B दुगरि . ; D बुधिyि and adda Ni AV (१२) BODaiर, महर्षित (१३) B D read. App. BCD. (PU) Brott (see 1, 3) ; D adds Blix 0 A om, this and the remaining examples of the gen. phun (२९) BDAt com. (e).CDHAN PCAT ·। ॥ विभक्रिविधान प्रथमं ॥ [I, 4-6. ( B C D) ॥ सुप ॥ देवेसु(१) । अग्गिसु(१) । बुद्धिसु(ए) । माला- सुर)। नई(५) । कुलेसु(१) । तुम्हेसु(७) । अन्हेसु(८) । (CD).|| इत्यादि) ॥ ॥ 4 ॥ क्वचिद् व्यत्ययः ॥ ४ ॥ एषां लिंगानां क्वचिद् व्यत्ययो भवति ॥ जम्(१०) ॥ विज्जो । देवाणि(११) रक्खंतु(१२) ॥ 150 मागमस्याप्य आमा पा(२६) हे।(१४) वा ॥ ५ ॥ (१५)मागमस्यामोऽनागमस्थापि णकारो भवति हो वा ॥ ताणं ताई ॥ देवाण(१९) देवाहं । कम्माणं । कमाई। (१०)मरिताणं मरिताहं । (C D)। (१८)तुम्हाणं तुम्हाह) । (CD) ॥ । ॥ 6 ॥ संख्याया(१६) एहः ॥ ६ ॥ 11- * यत्ययः। विपर्ययः॥ + C विजुणे। पि बनाए. (iii, 5 विदु)। सवर्मास्य. (iii, 16 विर असम (i, 12 विज्पुणे)॥ IC साणं। साई। तेषां करौर्य। एकस्सिम् स्थाने पः हिनौयस्थाने हो कि, वर्षो। सरिता। गुमाकं ॥ (१) A om., D देवे; B prefixes Skr. घमौतुं । (३) A बुडौल, B C go, D बुरी भाला। () A om., C, D सई and adds तुम । (८) B ग्रेड, C पहेसु, (१०) So A; B C D रसो असो, edds खाएं वारं; D adds देवाई। (१२) । (1) B साममवाप्यमो. पनाम परिवार B परिवाचा परिपाचार; D prefits imit D मा तपा। (१८) C D संचापाः । Om.

·I, 8-10.] ॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ संख्यायाः परस्य मागमस्थानागमस्थाप्य अामो पहो भवति ॥ (CD) । पंचाहं । तिौसह(१) । इत्यादि ॥ 1. ॥ 6 ॥ (CPANE ॥7॥ हि) भिमः ॥७॥ लिंगात् परस्य भिसो हि(२) भवति ॥ देवेहि । गामेहि(२) । (CD) 18 हिताभ्यमः ॥ ८ ॥ लिंगात् परस्य भ्या(५) हिंतो भवति ॥ गामेहिता)। मिद्धे- हितो)। बुद्धिहितो(८)। धेनुहितो()। नईहितो(१०)। तुन्देहिता(११) । अन्हहिंता(१२)॥ ॥ । हतीयादोनाम एवम १२. एकन्व स्त्रियां ॥ ८ ॥ हतीयादीनां टाङसिङस् डिवचनानां स्त्रियां ए भवति ॥ गंगाए । बुद्धौए(१४) । नईए(१५) । वहए(१६) । तौए(१०) । ताए|| ॥ 1110 || भाउन्नापा ५८) जाशमा: 10 || । • C पंचा। पंचानां ॥ पंचम्। बदागमो. (i, 11 पंच)। संस्थाया : (i,6 पंचपर)। पनुखारो• (ii, 15 पंचरह) + C मोसपई। मितां ॥ पिंगम। रेप:. (iii, 9 तिमत्)। अनुसारो• (ii, 15 तिमत् )। खरो• (ii, 4 नौमत् )। रममाण सा (Mi, 18 तौस)। नस्य च इत्य् पमेन नापः (iii, 38 तौस)। संसाया गह: (i,8 जीसा)। पमुखारो• (ii, 15 नौसरह)॥ 10 देवेषि। देवः॥ 60 मंगार। गंगथा । मंगाया: गंगाया। गंगायां ॥ || Cौर नार। नया तस्याः तस्याः तस्यां । MAAT, O D prefix form (P) B C D f (P) C D om. ; but Gee App. C D. (७) A हितो। () A भितो ॥ (९) A Com., B D ममापितो; D prefixes urat # () A forefint, B fecitar; C D read after and add अलौरिनो। मुरिलो। (८) B C युबमिो, A D बु॥ () C D धेषितो, A B को... (8.) C D पनिो (११) B D Tो• and पो० ॥ (१९) A. om. ; see i, 29. (एसनम, B पम् ॥ (१५) A B D बु० ॥ (१५) 0 DARI (1) A.. KOI CD place नारनौरी (E) A B चोरोो। ( NCD बसाने, ·॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ I, 10:--13. स्त्रियां वर्तमानयोर१) जशसार(९) ओउ खोपाश् च भवंति(६) ॥ : ()मालाश्री मालाउ माला । (४)बुद्धीओ बुद्धौउ बुद्धौ। (६)धेनूत्रो धेनूउ धेनू । नई नईउ नई* ॥ एवं शसोऽपि ॥ ॥ 10 || (C)) ॥ १० ॥ ॥ 11 ॥ पुंभि पूर्वत्वं ॥ ११ ॥ पुंमि(८) पुंलिंगे वर्तमानयोर् जश्शसाः(२) पूर्वखरो भवति ॥ अग्गी(द) । गुरू ॥ । ।। 12 || णा मेधा च ॥ १२ !! पुंलिंगे वर्तमानयोर् जश्शसार(२) णे भवति । पंचम्येकवचनस्य च ॥ अिग्गिो जलंति । मुणिणो परम(१०) । गिरिणे एति(११) नई(१२) । ॥ 13 ॥ स्मश(१२) पुंसि वर्तमानस्य ङमा ो भवति । स्मश्(२३) च भवति(१५) ॥ मुणिणे च उन्म:(१५) • C does not give the Sanskrit equivalent of any of these examples; but, instead of it, the two numbers 13 and 23 are inscribed over each form; thus मालाओ॥ +C यादृशः पूर्णशब्दस्य खरसाहश एव कर्तव्यः ॥ षमयः नसनि ॥ HC मुनौम् पा॥ || मिरेः सकाशात् रति नदो। B गिरितः रति बतो। A B मुनेः रूपं ॥ (९) A reads वर्तमाना एसे भति॥ (२) C D सस्मसेर्॥ (२) B reads . भति। होपो भवति ॥ (४) A has final चाँ, and D has final r, instead ot, in all examples ; ex. D pw; B places aren माशायी and No on throughout. (U) By in all three examples. (C) ACD for a all three examples. (0) B पूर्ववत् ॥ (८) A. om. (e) C D prefix देक। १०) सहित (१५) A B Cer, Dए। (१९) AC D , Bat: (१५) B HTRA TRAN) Aom.

·I, 14-18.] ॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ (रूपं (१)मुणिम रूपं । *अग्गिो सिंहा अग्गिरम सिहा ॥ (देवरा मोहा।। (CD) 1114 || ए मि ङः ।। १४ ।। पुंमि डिवचनस्य ए७) भवति । मि च भवति ॥ (अग्गिम्मि। (१)गुरुम्मिः ॥ (०)गामे गामम्मि ॥ || 15 ॥ (शसाइतः ।। १५ ।। अतः() अकाराद् उत्तरस्य शप्तः(१०) पुंमिंगे ए भवति ॥ देवे|| । वंभणे(१५) ॥ ॥ 18 ॥ ११ तोतुहितालापाम नन्यात: ॥ १६ ॥ (१२:पंचमी-प्रातः श्रादेशतकारस्थ(१४) तोतु हितोलोपा(१५) एते • BCच शिखा ॥ + C देवस्य शोभा॥ मे ॥ भगौ। बग्गी or चम्गिण (i, 11. 12) ॥ १॥ अग्गिं। भगौ or अग्गियो (i, 11 12) ॥२॥ चम्गिा (i, 64)। गौरि (i, 7) ॥३॥ अग्गियो or पगिस । बग्गौणं or पम्गौ (ii, 18. i, 5) ॥ ४॥ चम्गिणे (i, 12)। बग्गीहितो (i, 8) ॥ ५॥ चम्गिणे or पम्गिस (i, 18)। पकाएं or भगौहं (i, 5) ॥ ६॥ अग्गिए।१५) or चमिम्मि (i, 14)। भगौतु or गौत (i, 3. ii, 15)॥७॥ इबग्गौ। हे चम्गौ or ई चम्गिणे ॥ एवं एकारांतामा सबै पाणि॥ 5 गरी ॥ गुरू । गुरू or गुरणे ॥ १ ॥ गुरं । गुरू or गुरुणो ॥ २ ॥ गुवहा । गुरि॥१॥ गुरणे or गुणस्म । गुरुणं or गुरुः ॥ ४॥ मुरणों। गुरुरिती ॥१॥ गुरुयो or गुरम् । मुरुमं or गुरुकं ॥ ६ ॥ गुदर (१९) or गुरुम्मि । गुरून or गुरूतुं ॥ ७॥ से गुरु । रे गुरु or गुरुणे ॥ एवं उकारांनानां सर्वेषां रूपाणि ॥ || देवान् । ब्राह्मणाम् ॥ (१) A reads पस्स (see i, 12); B C D कवं ॥ (१) C D Vवं ; A B om. मुगिस पं। धमिणो सिहा ॥ (३) C places देवस सोह' before अग्गिस मिहा; A Bom. (8) C D fHy wafall (n) A prefixes fure, B C D wote il (() D prefixes मुबर, C गुरूर; but not A B. (७) C D prefix देवे । देवमि ॥ (८) B om. this shtra and its commentary. (२) A तो पकाराद। (१०) D शमः ॥ (१९) A mê (see ii, 15). (1) A B C D read Qro. for itgo, and C D insert fit after s, B has the marginal note हिं बुठि ॥ (११) A पंचमी वामन पारे, B पंचमी पर पारे,पंचमीचा पारे, D पंचत् परख पा ; C had originally पान, but the long á is cbanged to a by yellow pigment. (१४) B पादेशशतकारक (१५) A B C D E for मोतु., (९) MS. पम्मऔर and मुहर ।

·॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ [I, 17. 18. प्रादेशा भवंति(१) ॥ (२गयणातो* । गयणातु । (२)गयणतो । गयणातु। गयणहितार गयणा(४) ॥ ॥17॥ तदिदा में पष्टीरूपाणी, . तद्() इदम् अनयोर् एकवदित्वबहुत्वेषु स्त्रीपुंनपुंसकेषु यद् रूपं तस्य से भवति ॥ तस्या:(८) रूपं से रूप()। तस्याः(९) गुणाः(१०) से गुणा(११) (१२)अस्याः रूपं से रूप(१९) । (१७)अस्याः गुणः से गुणा । एवं शेषेच् अपि द्रव्या:(१५) ॥ !! 1.5 | अष्टः अत(१६) ऊर्छ युिभदध्यायो भवति ॥ * C गगमात् । कगचज. (or कटतीय iii, 34) इत्यनेन गकारस्य लोपः (गमन)। बस्थिते यत्वम् अवर्णः (or य• अवणे iii, 35 गयन)। सवर्गस्य० (iii, 16 गयण)। खरो. (ii, 4 गया)। ओ० (i, 16) रति गयणाओ ॥ + C गयणे (१७)। गयणा । हे गयणे। हे गयणा ॥ १॥ गयणं । गयणा or गयणे (i, 15) ॥ २॥ गयोण। गयणेहिं or गयणेहि or गयणेहिँ॥३॥ गयणस्म । गयणाणं or गयणा ॥ ४ ॥ गयणचा or गणयाउ or गयणyि or गयणारितो or गया। गयणेहिता ॥ ५॥ गयणस्म। गयणाणं or गयणाहं ॥ ६ ॥ गयणे or मयणम्मि। गयणेसु or गयणेसु ॥ ७॥ एवं सर्वेषां चकारातानां रूपं नेयं ॥ C युभ- छब्दस्य रूपाणि ॥ तुम। तुम्हे ॥ १॥ तुए or तुम। तुम्भे ॥ २॥ ते or तुमे or तर or तए। तुम्हेहिं or तुम्हेहि or तुम्हेहिं ॥१॥ तुह or तुझ or तुम्ह। तुम्हाणं or तुम्हार or तुन्छ ॥ ४ ॥ तुन्हाहिं or तुम्हाहितो or तुम्हायो or नरो। तुम्हेरितो ॥ ५ ॥ तुr or तुभ or तुन्छ। तुम्हाणं or तुम्हाइं or तुम्हं ॥ ६॥ ना or तुमम्मि। तुन्देत or तुम्हेसं ॥ ७॥ (१) A adds हिच; B C D insert fr after •तु० ॥ (२) A गयो, गयराज with , B C D गयणायो। गयशा (with ā). (३) A गयणहितो (with ā); it also adds toure (with á), while B C D prefix it. (४) C D add एवं देवादयः ॥ (५) A B D •मो॥ (6) A om. षष्ठौ॥ (७) C D तत् ॥ (८) A B नया ॥ (e) So A; B C D ॥ (१०) A B C गुहा॥ (११) A D मुखाः ॥ (१२) A B om. the two last examples. (१३) A B C D ॥ (१४) D om. this example, but, on the other hand, adds अयोः रूपं से कई । नामां रूपं से रुवं ॥ (१५) B •था॥ (१९) C D TRE (१७) So in MS., as masc.

·I, 19-22.] ॥ विभफिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ 19 ॥ १.तुम सो भविभनः ॥ १० ॥ युमच्छब्दस्य सविभके सौ परत(२) तुमं श्रादेशो भवति ॥ (२)तुम देवो(४) ॥ (CD)॥ युभदो अमि परे (तुमं भवति तुए । मविभक्तः ॥ तुम भणमि* तुए भणामि(८) ॥ (CD)॥ युग्मदो (११)जमि परे तुम्भे(२०) भवति। मविभनेः ॥ तुम्भे(१०) मिनुम्मा(१२) सूरा(१२) ॥ युमदः(१५) शसि परे तु (१४) भवति । मविभक्तः ॥ तुम् (२४) मनुम्मा (१६) भणामि(१७) ॥ * C भणामि। संस्कृतसमम् अत्र ॥ + C माणुमा । मनुष्य ॥ खरो० (ii, 4 मामुष्य) । नवर्गस्य० (iii, 16 माणुष्य)। रशषाणां सः (iii, 18 माणुम्य) । भवस्नेभ्यो० (iii, 2 माणुम)। लापे० (iii, 24 माणुस )। पंसि० (i, 11 माणुस्मथ)। स्वराणां (ii, 1) माणुस्मा ॥ to here gives the same gloss as the preceding, omitting only the initial KTTO II - (१) C_rends तं तु तुवं तुहं ।। तुम सौ स०; D संत तुर्व तुहं तुम सी स० ॥ (२) C D read परत एते पंच आदेशा भात ॥ (२) C reads तं तु तुवं तुई॥ त्वं तुम दिठो॥ (१) C दिठो, D दिहो ॥ (५) C D place this sutra after the following. (() C D add तुमं तं ॥ (७) C D read तुर तुमं तं च भवति। सविभनो । (८) C D place this example before the other, and add तं भवामि ॥ (e) C D place this sútra before the preceding one. (१०) So B, A तुम्धे, C तुम्हे, D तुको । (११) A places असि परे after भवति ॥ (१२) So B; A महिमा, C D माशुस्मा ; in C मनुस्मा is corrected by later hand, but the original reading (माणमा is supported by the marginal gloss (q. v.). (१३) A सपा, B शराः; C D add the Skr. translation यूयं मनुष्याः पराः (C in MS. सूराः) ॥ (१४) A तुभो, B तुम्। (१५) A •दम् ॥ (१५) A मामा, C D मणमा ॥ (१७) C D add Skr. यमान मनुष्याम भशामि॥ , . 2 ·१० ॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥ [I, 23. 24. ॥2॥ ते तुमे तर तए दाया ।। २३ ।। युभद:(९) टावचने (२)परे ते तुमे तर तए एते श्रादेशा भवंति। मविभकः ॥ कि(४) ते कत(५) । तुमे *दिट्ठो ६)। ति मझ() कत(५)। तए पलात८॥ ॥ 1 ॥ तुमातिमा, न युमदः(१९) पंचम्येकवचने परे तुमाहि (१३) तुमाहिता(१४) तुमातो(१५) तदत्ता(११) एते श्रादेशा भवति । मविभक्तः ॥ तुमाहिं अहं सुरो १५) तुमाहितो(१७) अहं सुही(१८) । तुमातो(१०) अहं नाणी(१९) । ततो(१९) निक्खता(२०) ॥ (CD) | . * C दिहो । दृष्टः ॥ स्वरारि० (ii, 5) इत्य अनेन सूत्रेण दृ इत्य् अस्य दि भवति (दिष्टः)। वर्ग (ii, 3) इत्य चनेन सूत्रेण र इति षकारस्य लोपः। ट स्थितं (दिटः)। लोपे० (iii, 24 दिः)। मस्मिन् (iii, 26 दि)। एदोद्र० (ii, 10 दिडयो)। खराणां० (ii, 1 दिट्ठो) ॥ + CB त्वया मध्यं कृतं॥ +B पक्षातं । प्रलातं ॥ ( पलतं । प्रलप्तं ॥ $ B बदई ज्ञानौ॥ || C ज्ञानौ। वर्णविश्लेषे कृते सति ज्ञा इति स्थितं। शाञ्च (iii, 6) इत्य बनेन अलोपः (जानौ)। हजथानां० (iii, 19 नानौ)। नवर्गस्य० (iii, 16 नाणो)॥ . (१) Bटा॥ (२) AC D दरु ॥ (२) A om. परे-एते inel. (४) A किको । (५) A B C D कयं ; C D add the Skr. translations किं त्वया लतं । बया दृष्टः । बया मम (B मध्यं in marginal gloss, q. v.) कृतं । त्वया प्रल (so C D प्रलपिन) । (4) A B रिट्ठो, C दिठो, D दिट्टो (१) ॥ (6) A मज्ज कयं, B मंचलियं, C D मउभ कयं । (5) A पात, B पक्षातं, C पल, D पलवितं॥ () B तुमहिंतो॥ (१०) A D तुमाल, B C तुमायो॥ (११) C D तरतो॥ (१२) A •दः ॥ (१९) A तुमाहिम इत्यादयः, om. the other forms. (१४) B तुमहिंतो, A om. (१५) B C तुमायो, D तुमाउ, A om. (१९) B सूयो; D adds the Skr. translations लय पर। त्वद् पह सभगः । बद् पर जानी। बप मिष्ठांना, C om. them in the text, but gives them in the marginal gloss. (१७) A om. तुमारितो॥ (१८) B orig. संशयो, corr.सु.; D ETO (1) BATTNT, A C D rent (see iü, 6. iii, 19). (Po) So D; C føro, A मिसानो, B रसवंतो॥ .

·I, 25-28.]
॥ विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं ॥
युभदः षष्ठ्येकवचने परे (३)तुह तुज्झ(४) तुम्ह(५) एते आदेशा भवति ।
मविभकः॥ *तुह मौल(द) । तुज्झ(१) कलाश्रो)। तुम्ह(८) गुणा() ॥
॥
अत(१०) अर्द्ध (११) अम्मदध्यायो भवति(१२) ॥
अस्मदः (१३) टावचने परे मे मए भवतः । मविभक्त: १५) | मेि कत५) ।
मए दिटुं(२६)॥
* C नव मौल । नव कलाः । तव गुणाः ॥
+ मया रुतं ॥
.
.
(१) A तुझ, B तुझ्झ । (२) B तुम, C D तुम्हः ॥ (३) A om. तुह, तुभा, तुम् ।
(४) B तुझ्झ॥ (५) B तुझ, D तुम्हा ॥ (६) A शौलं ॥ (6) A कासाचो, B कहा।
(5) A B तुम (९) A गणो॥ (१०, B इत, D अतः ॥ (१९) B C D कई
(१२) A निरूप्यते। (११) A C दषु ॥ (१४) A B om. (१५) A B C D NX3B
C Dadd the Skr. translations मया कृतं । मया दृष्टं ॥ (१५) A दिम, B fes
(१७) So A; BC D मरतो।

·१२ ॥ विभक्रिविधान प्रथमं ॥ [I, 29-31:. अस्मदः(१) पंचम्येकवचने परे मदत्तो(२) भवति । मविभकः ॥ *मदत्तो(२) तुमं सूरो(५) ॥ ॥ ॥ श्राहिता । स्याम 6 . अस्मदो (६) भ्यसि परे अम्हाहितो(५) भवति । मविभक्त:(७) ॥ अम्हाहितो(८) तुम सूरो() ॥ महसमा अस्मदः षष्ठ्येकवचने परे मह मज्झ(१९) भवतः । मविभः ॥ मिह मौल । मा गुणा(१३) ॥ (१२) अस्मद(१५) श्रामि परे अम्ह(१६) भवति। सविभक्तः ॥ अन्ह(१६) चिय ते दोसा(१७)॥ || BI|||||| ॥ I ॥ इति चंडकृते प्राकृतलक्षणे विभक्रिविधानं प्रथमं समाप्नं ॥१॥ * C मईसो । मन् ॥ + C मम मौल(१८)। मम गुणाः ॥ + Bअस्माको दोषाः ॥ (१) 'A °द: ॥ (२) C D मरतो; B तो om. म; A मे मए भवतः (see i, 27). (V) A AFRI, BCD ART !! (8) A XT:; B places it before g#; D adds Skr. translation त्वं सरः॥ (५) A हम्हाहिंतो ॥ () B °दः ॥ (७) A B Com. (८) A पन्हाशिमो, Bषमा ॥ (6) A रो॥ (१०) B om. sutra and comment, but gives the examples. (१९) A मझ, C D मउभा॥ (१२) A मौतं; C D add मा. सौखें। मह गुण ॥ (१२) B सौल॥ (१४) D पाम् ॥ (१५) B C D •ः ॥ (१) D॥ (१७) B दोसा: B C D add the Skr. translation धमाकम् एव ने दोषाः॥ (१८) MS. सिलं ॥

·II, 11. 1.]] ॥ खरविधानं द्वितीयं ॥ १३ ॥ II ॥ अथ स्वरविधानम् आह ॥२॥ - स्वराणा स्वर २ . प्रकविलोपमधयः ।। १ ।। खराणं खरे परे २) (२)प्रकृतिर लोपस् ‘संधयश् च भवंति। *दह(४) अच्छति(५) । दिच्छति)। दिहागता(१) ॥ मह(८) दूव हितो । देविंदवदिता(र)। मक्कोसाणा(१०) ॥ * *म मरो (११) । नियमोमा(१२) । गहेमो(१२) ||||तपोपरोहो॥ (१५)मा ऊढा । पापानीमासूमामा(१६) । *मोरो(१०) गामो(१८) गामा ।। - ११चंदुज्जला(१४) *** ॥ * CTE बच्छ । प्रकृति । अत्र तिष्ठति । वस्य माधनिका। खरो. (ii, i) इत्य पमेन चकारस्य र भवति (त्र)। रेफः० (iii, 9 रस)। प्रथम० (iii, 11) इत्यमेन मकारस्य थकारः (इथ)। पुनः प्रथम० (iii, 11) इत्यनेन थकारस्य धकारः (ध)। हो. (iii, 18 TV)। इह इति सिहं ॥ नियति(१९) । कगधज (iii, 34 इति)। स्वरो० (ii, 4) इत्यनेन इकारस्य चकारः (अष्टनि)। षाहः (iii, 8 अति)। रशपा. (iii, 18 वर्मात)। सस्य खबहाः (iii, 14 अति)। लोप० (iii, 24) तस्मिन० (iii, 26 अच्छति)। पुनः कगचज• (i, 34 बछर)॥ + B C या धकारस्य लोपः ॥ + B रागनः। C संधि। पत्र पागतः ।। B मख स्वहितः ॥ ||C लोपः। देवेन्द्रवन्दितः ॥ TB पक्रय(२०) ईशानघ । चलोपः ।। C लोपः । भक बने शान । द्विवयणे वनवयणं (see ii, 12) । पक्रय शाम शक्रेशानी ** B सवरः । C संधिः। शया ईरः । चौधरः ॥ ++ C लोपः । पिदम बग्रेईशः । निदशेशः। त्रिदशानां ईशः॥ + C संधिः। पहाणां ईशः॥ C लोपः । चंद्र चये उज्वला। चंद्रवत् उज्वला ॥ |||| B नपसः उपरोधः। C संधिः। सपोपरोधः ॥ TT B निःश्वासथ उन्लामय । चलोपः। C लोपः। (२१) निःशासच उच्चासम। मिःचासो- छासी॥ ** C संधिः। मोरो। मगरः ॥ ttt B ग्रामतः ग्रामः । C गामाउ गामो । प्रकृतिः। गामो गामो। संधिः । मामात् पामः । but see note to translation. . . (१) Bom, (२) B C D परतः ॥ (९) So A B; C D प्रकृतिलोपमंघयस॥ (४) A has only the examples marked * and g, om. all others ; B places ६.tt. (५) A पई, B C D पच्छर॥ (१) B C D इच्छर ॥ (७) Bहागज, रागो, D राग॥ (८) A महई वडि, B महर्षिय (see marginal gloss), C D om. this example. (c) B •दिऊ, D दिख, A Com. (see ii, 2). (१०) B भाणे, A om. (९१) C D ससरो, B सदूसरो, A om. (१२) B मौसो, A om. (१२) B गासा, A om. (१४) B दजला, A om. (१५) B सोढो, C से ऊढो, D माउढा or डाडा (१) () So B; A om., C D हौसा० ॥ (१७) C D add मजरो ॥ (१८) B गामामामो । मामो गामा मामो, गामाउ गामो, D गामा गामो ॥ (१९) So MS. and accordingly the explanation पाहः ॥ (२.) MS. मनस्य मानश्या । (२१) MS. निसा, असा ॥ , ·॥ स्वरविधानं द्वितीयं। [II, 1-4. बुद्धौ) दमा । 'बुद्धिंदे। (२) । बुद्धौमा ॥ बुद्धौत्रो(१) । नईओ ॥ " भयोग पर लापः ।। (४)संयोगे परे स्वरे परत: पूर्वस्वरस्य(५) नित्यं लोपो भवति॥ धनाढ्यः धनड्डो)। देव इन्द्रः(८) देविंदो । कृत उद्योग:() कतुज्जोश्रो १० ॥ ॥ खरा हुस्खत्वं १९) भवति। (१९)संयोगेऽक्षरे(१३) परे ॥ (१)कब १५) । कज्ज । |इच्छित १६) । तिक्खा । **मिग्घो(१७) । उट्ट१८) । सुज्जो (१९) ॥ !! स्वरो. :) - * C बुद्धौ रमा। प्रतिः ॥ + B बुद्धौन्द्रः। C लोपः । बुद्धि इंद्रः॥ f C बुद्धौसो । संधिः ॥ SC प्रतिः। बुद्धयः । नद्यः ॥ || 13 ईप्सित । C इच्छिञ्च । भिनं ॥ से वर्गीचं (iii, 4 सितं)। सस्य. (iii, 14 ईशित)। लोपे० (iii, 24) तस्मिन् ० (iii, 26 ईच्छित)। इखलं (ii, 3 रछित)। कगचज. (iii, 34 इच्छि) । पा C तौक्ष्णं । वर्णविशेषे कृते सति क ष ण क रनि मिटताः भवन्ति। रणषा• (iii, 18 नोक्स्क)। शा(iii, 6 तोकसं)। ऐ० (iii, 4 लौस)। सस्य. (iii, 14 तौखं)। लोपे० (iii, 24) सस्मिन् (iii, 26 तौक्वं)। इखत्वं (ii, 3 सिक्वं)॥ ** B खिग्धं ॥ +1B जई॥ V (१) BD . here and afterwards. (२) B D बडौदो (but see marginal gloss). (२) B prefixes एवं वडो॥ (४) C D संयोगपरे॥ (५) A पूर्वखरूपस्य ॥ (() A •gः, Boयः ॥ (0) A धनावो, B धनट्ठो, C D धसडो॥ (८) B देवेन्द्रः ॥ (e) A ज्यो, C D उद्योतः ।। (१०) A Nतुज्जो, B C कउज्जोयो, D कउनोउ ॥ (११) C prefixes पूर्वस्य ॥ (१२) C D place this clause before इखत्वं ॥ (१२) C D संयोगाक्षरे ॥ (१४) 0 prefixes धमट्टो (see ii, 2); C D prefix the Skr. translations कायं । कार्य। ईमि । नौक्षणं । मौनः। जई। सूर्यः, see also B in the marginal gloss. (१५) B का (१६) A B C D चिं॥ (१७) A om. this and the remaining examples ; . सिग्धा ) B Gडं (see ii, 5. 9), C D अडं ॥ (१९) B सुब्बा ।

·II, 5-7. ॥ खरविधान दितीयं ॥ १५. खरो ऽन्यो ऽन्यस्य स्थाने भवति ॥ *कातव्य(१) । सुदण(२) । इंगाला(२) । B C D । बुद्धौए() । धेनूए)। नेपुर(६)। B C D | कुचापि गच्छति(२) कत्थ(८) पि गच्छति॥ . । ॥ सुवर्णस्य स्थाने खरा(१९) भवंति। रि च भवति(१२) ॥ घृतं घतं(१४) । कृत्वा काढण(१५) । दृष्यते दौमते (१६) । ऋषिः(१०) इमि(१८) । पृथ्वी पुथवौ १९)। वृद्धः(२०) वुड्डो(२१) । वृंत २२) वेंट(२२) । उत्कृष्टं उक्कोस(२४) सुणं रिणं । (CD)॥ - । ऐतः(२६) स्थाने ए भवति ॥ वेतडी(२०) । तेम्म(२८) । सेंधवं । ॥ वरं (२)॥ * B कर्त्तव्यं ॥ + B सूचौनां (३०) ॥ + C बुद्या ॥ FB वेतालः ॥ || C मम वरं केनापि सहन ॥ (१) A कायचं, B कायच, C कायध्वं, D काययं (see iii, 29 and Lassen Inst. Prac. pp. 141. 365); C D add the following Skr. translations कर्तव्यं । स्वजनं । खंगाराः ; see also B in the marginal gloss. (२) A असुदर्भ, D स्वर्ण ॥ (३) A रगाल, B रंगलौ ॥ (४) A B D दु; ID prefixes वुद्धे ॥ (५) A C D घेणूर ॥ (() A मेजरं, B मेऊर, वरं, D उरं॥ (७) A om. (८) A om., B कत्त्यं घि, D कछ वि॥ (8) A B C D गछर ॥ (१०) B खरो॥ (११) Bom. (१२) B reads धन्यखरो भवति ॥ (१३) A om. (१४) A B C D घयं ॥ (१५) A काउण, B काडुण, C D काऊण: D adds तूप प्रत्यय ॥ (१६) A B C दौमइ, D दौमर ॥ (१७) So C; A B Dषि। (१८) So A B C D; C D add यास ऋषिः वास इसी ॥ (1) A B C D पुहवौ॥ (२०) A B C D दो ॥ (११) A B बुट्टो, C D वुडो॥ (२२) A B D कृतं || (२३) A विठं, B विसं, CD विंटं॥ (२५) A उहोस, B बोसो, C पक। सं, D असं (see iii, 8). (२५) ऐरेतः॥ (२९) A एन (२७) A बेघहो, B वेषहो, C D बेचट्टो; C D prefix the Skr. translations वैताया। । सेंधर्व वैरं; see also B in marg. gloss. (२८) A ते ॥ (२९) C D add मज्भर के वि (see marg. gloss). (३) MS. सुधीमां।

·॥सरविधानं द्वितीयं ॥ [II, 8-11. ऐतः(१) खाने अर) सार) भवति। ऐश्वर्य) असरिया) । वै) बर) ॥ ॥ 8 ॥ ओर ) औतः ॥ ८॥ । प्रोत:() स्थाने श्रो(१०) भवति ॥ (११)श्रोम(११) । (१)मोवञ्चल(२४) R 1.9॥ अउ (१५) श्रौत:(६) स्थाने अउ (१९) भवति ॥ (१०)मउरो१८) । कउरवा । कउला। (CD)॥ ॥ 10॥ एदोद्रलोपा(१८) विसर्जनौयस्य(२०) ॥ १० ॥ एत् श्रोतलोपा(२९) विसर्जनौयस्य स्थाने भवंति ॥ कतरे(२९) गच्छति(२९) । "दित्तरूपे(२४) । देवो । विभणे । पुपरनि(२५) । म । एस(२९) । (२०)वति(२९) । बुद्धि(२८) । विह(२८) । ॥ 11 ॥ (१०)अदागमोऽनुवारलोपौ च व्यंजनस्य(२१) ॥ ११ ॥ । 10 • रोप्तरूपः ॥ + C बामणः॥ 1 C पुरैर वि । (पुनः पपि)। र प्रत्ययः (ii, 0 अपि)। अय्यस्योर पस्लोपः (ii, 18 पुक्षर पि)। प्रथमस्य० (ii, 12 पसरवि) ॥ FC वधूः ॥ (१) A B रत ॥ (२) B पई॥ () C om. Bइन्ययमादेभो ॥ (४) ऐच ॥ (1) B : 0 D रि॥ (4) D॥ (७) B om.; C D add the example वै वर, whereto c has the marg. gloss ये स्कुटनित्रययोः ॥ (८) A अर्, D उर्॥ (e) B चोन ॥ (१०) An, BS, D॥ (११) C pref. Skr. औषधं D अषधं ॥ (१२) A जसर, D (PROC pref. Skr. साचलं, D सौवर्वस्वं ॥ (१४) A सोमप्पस, C सोप, D सोचच Dadd the example सौर्य साम्॥ (१५) Bषयो (१६) BC om. (१७) CD pref. sir. सोलाकौरवाः । कोलाः॥ (१८) B सरि॥ (१९) A •प, D •पा, B (corrupt) रदारसे ॥ यः॥ (२०) B नौवस्थामे ॥ (२५) B (corrupt) रदो साया ॥ (१२) 4 वयोरे, :B पयादि; CD road कयरे and prof. Skr. कतर गचति ॥ "(१२) A मई, B C D अबर: OD add the example तापुर। बसेर (२५) A दिलाये, B मिचे, D विसको Cadd सविणे (in marg. gloss वीरजिनः), D बालजिये। (P) D.पुरपि OD. prat. skr. पुनः चपि; A om. this example ; B adds मंदित (MS. एरिहो। Form. (PO). B C D E Cadds skr. पतिः, D पति। () A B इंग पुगोoriginally पौ, now it has been changed to ryt; B C D place at BHANDAमानखारतापा, omanimal ·ITE 18] (चकारामनाउनुस्खारखोपो .. व्यंजगस्य भवति ॥ सिरिता) । (CD) | tकर्ष(") । (CD)। सौमर ॥ ॥मिरे०) । (CD)॥ ॥ 12 ॥ दिवं बहवेना) ॥ १२ ॥ (६)दिवचनं बहुवचनेन(१०) वाच्यं ॥ "इत्या। पाया। देवा । भणा(१५)। CD ॥ ॥ 13 ॥ षष्ठौवच्(१९) चतुर्थों ॥ १३ ॥ षष्ठीवच १९) चतुत्यौं द्रव्या ॥ नमो(१४) जिनम्म(१५) । नमो(१५) गुरुण(१९) ॥ || 138 || CD|| १३१ ।। || 13" || CD|| १३१ ।। •पत् । परागमः ॥ + B सरित् इति पर नकारस्य पचाममः ॥ सरिन् । पदाममः॥ 1B कर्माधिनि बच रेफरलोपोनवारोऽनुसारः (sic!) | C वर्षम् ॥ HB सौमित्या रेफसोपः (sic!) | C शिरस् ॥ || B शिरसि(१०) सोपः ॥ रिमाल दुश्य(१८) बहुवयम् चयिविभौर सौ(१८) भार । ना सत्य ना पाया। बदामि देवा(२०) रेवाएं। CHो। पादौ । देवो । प्राण ॥ tt B नमो बिनाय रति नमा मुरवे रत्यक चतुबौं षष्ठी या ॥ C ममः जिनाय । नमः मुरवे ॥ । . (९) A adds भवनि, C D read चकाराममानुसारोपाच॥ (P) B TTATH (al A सरिवार, B C D सरिचा। (४) Badds र (समा ?, see App. PD), D profixes कर्मन्, मौर्षन्, शिरसा to कर्म, सौर्स, सिरे respectively. (4) Ah (O BATU AO Dota. (0) A om. (८)CD कवचमेना (e) C.D.prer जागो मारोगा त्यारोमाविमीमां (..)D.॥ (१) वा (ceo ii, 15). (RBCD om...(१२) Bी, D पोर। (१४) CD मो॥ (NA जिला ODविक्ष (१) ODada rमो परांनाएं। (१०) MS.पिरति (0) M8. now hay refrafity, om. but in the place and at there were originally different readings, which are now literi Tollow risment and can no more be made out. (९)MBARI HT Hama Manav..ad ·" (ULA ETI ॥ तामा(५) ॥ १४ ॥ वण कारनकारी न भवति ॥CDI D॥ (0-15 ॥ अनुखारो बाढलं ॥ १५ ॥ रस्थ कपिल लोपो भवति । कचिद् भागमः(५) । कचित् प्रकृतिः) 1.CD ॥ वंभणा() । 'मंजरो(८) । विशुत्रो)। थुिनौ९.) । काण(१९) । । नईहि(१५) ॥ मचात(१४) । (CD) ॥ संगो(१७ । भंगा(१४) YGD) । दुई(१५) । समिद्ध(२५) ॥ 16 गोर गावि(१६) ॥ १६ ॥ मो पदस्थ गावि(१०) इति(१८) भवति निपातेन ॥ गावी (१९) गावीचो(२०) । गावौं (२१) । गावीए(२९) । गावौहिं(२२) । गावौहितो(११) गावीण) । गावीमुं(२५) ॥ - माचार + पूर्वः (of. note १०). +C चूर्वः (of. note १०). C संहानं . C गौः । मावा or मा । । गया। गेः । गोर गवि (see i, 9.)। गोभिः । गोभ्यः । मां or गोमां। मोषु ॥ C D insert a (see i, 16). (२) ० मुतवर्गः, D मुताः॥ (VCD read रनवारणकाराम पावते न भवति ॥ (४) Bom. (1) C D •मो भवति ॥ (1) OD निति (see App.). (७) D भयो। (5) So A; B HUTT (see H. O. ii, 182); DD read मारो (sse H. C.i, 26) and add बब्बरी (see H. C. ii, 182); D test her addo grant ll () A om., B foget ; D has foye.with sufar alter it; which is explained in the marginal glosses विद्या प्रति (NA, Bो, पुष, Dपुणे ॥ (१५) So A, B कावणं (कादू में OData (sab H, C.i, 27). (१९) A कार्ड, Bा (कातुं ?, see Tasses 185.i, c.iv,214). , (१५) C D E D gives it as an example of arphins it in the marginal gloss as it riginally the gloss hed air, hat it has been corrected to om., BOD सायं. (100-Damil App: (१) 4 गापि, मानौ। (१०) D गयी। (E) B ति.निमा on नि ॥ (विक गाई। (१०) बानी Bमा (१५)4 Bom (R) AD बाबीर, नगर) DW Datu Dahe, O D add - 1 PER P KUMAR WHAMRm RAImashtail ·II, 17-20.] ॥सरविधानं दितीयं ॥ १४ || 17 || एवार्थ पदचेयचिया: २ ॥ १७ ॥ (२)एव शब्दार्थे णदू (२)चेय चिय एते श्रादेशा भवंति ॥ गत्या एव ("गति पद । (१)मति पर। * चेय(र) । सिधिय(०) ॥ ॥ 18 || अप्यस्यार अलोपः ॥ १८ ।। अपि अमि (८) एतयोर् अस्य लोपो भवति ॥ (१० मरो पि । (११कतं पि । तं सि इह ॥ नत्ता चा टु वएग(१२१ श्री १४, प्पि २५) पूर्वकानार्थ (4) |॥२६॥ एते(१०) पूर्वकालार्थे(१८) भवंति ॥ वंदिक्तु(१८) । विदित्ता(२०) । सुचा(२९) । ||कड्ड । भो (२९) । भोत्तूण(२९) । विदित्रो(२४) । (२५)एवं कपि"। ॥10॥ १२ CD || || 20 || मत्वर्य :९ अान्नदला * B तमेव ॥ + B स एव ॥ + B C दिखा ॥ 5 B शुला। का ( see note २१ || B C कला || IIC भुक्ता(२८). ** B एवं हाला॥ . (९) A B मर•॥ (२) A • वेप विय, B चिये ॥ (२) B एवं ॥ (४) A B C D गर । (i) A C मर मर B मई गई, D om. whole example, C prefixes Skr. मत्या एष। (() A सम्बेय, Dन चेय; C pref. Skr. सं एव, D तत् एव ॥ (6) So B; A •षिय (पिय? see p. 20, note १९), C •चिय, D•पेय,; C D pref. Skr. स एव । (८) B C D अनयर पोपो भवति ॥ () A खोपा स्यात् ॥ (१०) A B C D वि; C D pref. Skr. transl. परः बपि। कतम् पपि। बम् पसि ॥ (१९) A कपि, B कयं प्पि, C D कयं वि ॥ (१२) A TI (११) C D add तुषार॥ (१७) D; C D add वि॥ (१५) C D om., but add पि बेपिषु॥ (१९) So A ; B C D om. (१७) B D om. (१८) B C पूर्वकास; C adds मा रन्यस्यने बारेमा भवति ॥ (१९) A बंदितु, B दिनु ; C D add सम्बे विविदिपरे। बंदिवासान् पपि मिरचंदान् ।। (१०) BAौला ॥ (२५) A उमा, C D भुषा॥ (११) D भोतुं। (१२) भोपूर, D भोतूर or भोतूर? ; O D add काउचाय, see App. (९) A दिवं, D दि; C D add वंदेवि॥ (२५) A रख कर, Bएवं क. CD om. this example. (११) A ME DEI (२०) A TV, BC (१८) MS. भोका. -- ·२. ॥ खरविधान द्वितीयं ॥ [II, 21, 22. मत्वर्थ (१) एतौ प्रत्यया (२) भवतः(२) ॥ (४)जडाला(५) जडिखोर)। फडालो(०). फडिलो(८) । (CD)॥ ॥21॥ तातावर) तावत: ॥ २१ ॥ तावच् छन्दस्य(१०) ता तावो(११) भवतः ॥ ( C D)॥ ता* विच्छिन्न(१२) गयणं ताव चिय(१२) जलहिणो(१५) पि(१५) गंभौरा। ता(१९) गुरुत्रा(१०) सुरसेला(१८) धारेहि(१८) न(२०) जाव लज्जते ११ ॥९॥ ।। 22॥ उपमाने पिव इव विव विय २२' व्वर २३ वजह २४) वतः ॥ २२ ॥ उपमानार्थे (२५) वत:(२६) शब्दस्य एते श्रादेशा अवंति ॥ चंदणं(२७) पिव । चमरमिव । कमलं विव तुज्झ(२८) मुहं । गिन्हो(२९) विय । सायरव्य(२०)। • C तावत् विस्तीर्ण गगर्म मावन एव जलधयः च गंभौराः। यावत् गुरुः सुरशैलः धाराभिः न यावत् रयते ॥ + C गुरुचा। गुरः। एदोद्र० (ii, 10 गुरुयो)। खरो० (ii, 4 गुरुचा)। प्रथमैकवचमं सिहं ॥ 1 C चंदणं। चनुखारो बजलं (ii, 15). GC नब मुखं कमलवन (९१)॥ (९) B om., C D add पास इज॥ १) A om. (२) A स्थः ॥ (8) C D prefix Skr. translations मठामाम् । फटावाम् ॥ (५) A जडाशो ॥ (K) B जडिलो, and places (, ५. (७) A फडामो; B orig. फडालो, but corrected to फलानो ॥ (5) B फडिलो. placing ८, ७. () C D read ना-साव-जा-जावास् सावधावतो॥ (१०) C D add यावरब्दस्य तु॥ (११) C D add नाजाया ॥ (१९) A बचिन, C D विवि । (१९) A विष, C D चिय॥ (१४) B नपरिणे ॥ (१५) A व B वि, C D य ॥ (११) C D ना; A om. this line. (१७) D गाथा॥ (१८) B सुरलेण॥ (१९) B धौरेकिं, c. m. (२०) CD ॥ (११) Bजा लिजंति, C D नाव लिजति ॥ (२२) B वियं ॥ (२३) D E (see H. C. ii, 150). (२४) Bा (sic). (२५) A om., Cउपमानेऽथ, D उपमार्थे; Badds पिव व विव वियं यव महा॥ (२९) A बच्०, C वतु, D वन ॥ (१७) A B 40; CD prefix the Skr. translations चंदनवत्। चमरवत् (D MS. चमरं यत्)। कमजवत् । पौभवत्। सागरवस् (D सावरवम्)। मेषस्य यत् ॥ (२८) A तुज, B तुम्म ॥ (२९) C मिन, D मि॥ (१०) D सायरन, ANोपाय, Bोषधा ॥ (११) MS. कमस विव ॥ .

·. असम (1) एस(१) फको तुम भानिण) ॥23॥ श्रोखम्() वापयोः ॥ २३ ॥ अवपयोः खाने भो भवति ॥ भवामित(८) उपसरित(१) प्रोसरित(१५) । अपवरक (१९) पोवरो(१९) ॥ ॥24॥ खलो:(१४) खः ॥ २४ ॥ खिलुशब्दस्य खुर ादेशो भवति ॥ C D । एवं खु(१५) जसपोलणी ॥25॥ तो वर्तमानार्थ १६) ॥ २५ ॥ यो वर्तमानकालार्थे(१०) श्रान प्रत्ययम्(१८) तस्थार्थ तकारो भवति भिधमान(१८) भिजतं । कथ्यमानं कथित(२०) माध्यमान साहित(२९) । A ॥ ॥ 26 ॥ (२२ में मासु युभदः ॥ २६ ॥ (२७)युमर छब्दस्य सर्वासु(२५) विभनिषु(२६) भे(१०) भवति ॥ C DIi निसामेथ(२८) यूयं निशम्यत(२९) | C D । भे भामि युमान् भणामि भे कत(१०) खया कृतं । C D || • एप (फरः) तव भाति या संखया(११) ॥ + C खलु इति पवयं निवार्य 1. यंत्रपौरमं॥ (AT (२) बेस । (९) A TER (४) A B C D भार॥ (१) D C] place संबो ना c. m. (९) A B D उत्तम् ॥ (0) B बोर्॥ (८) BO शामिन ।। ABासि, बोहासिकं, D हसियं, B adds पति शेकसि। (१०) Bor (११) A B C सरिघ, D उमरिष॥ (११) बमवरका, Bषपचकः॥ (१९) Batw I.Pारत॥ (१७) A Bre, Dr (१५) B गुज। पोस। (१) (१०) Dom. कार B •मान काखा (15) B प्रत्ययमा, om. (Ve, पिला, B भिधमार्ग, मेष.।, (२०) A कानि., BODair. (१ go (ep) BOAT (1) O D place this sútra aftør i, 25 (i. e. after i, 284 own reckoning tee App.CD), (९५) B बुमदर... (ECT (Addपरना DB मेर। (C) Dions DB (O) A B UT, OD () MS.

·असदी अnि सापि सर्वास विभमि में भवति ॥ CD I CL मेडेग(१) भणामो भे तु) वयं युभाम् खेहेन(९) भणामः । । त्य बर्य । D॥ ॥27--271 CD ॥ २७-२७ ।। ॥ 28 ॥ तेर् दयः ॥ २८ ॥ ॥ इति अब्दस्य दय आदेशो भवति ॥ दया) एवं ॥ 29 ॥ भावे लण(5) ॥ २९ ॥ भावार्थे(४) सण (१०) प्रत्ययो भवति ॥ (११)गामसणं । नयरतण(११) । 12900CD ॥२१॥ || II ॥ इति (११ बीचंडवतप्रायतलक्षणे(१४) १५)स्वरविधान(१९) दितीयं समाप्त(१०) ॥२॥ -- OD place this şútra after i, 81 fi. e. after i, 81* of thoir own reckoning, vee App. CD). (P) OD add w parent (U) A om. the whole soramentary, instead of which it has sentent (o) CD *** () Borgo AL (E) ABNE (DA भाय। (१):AT,BTE praf, the Bir, translations in (OBCD कतिपय Aome trom ·वनविधान सोच III ॥ अथ व्यंजनविधानम् पार ॥३॥ ॥ ५० ॥ हाद(१) यवा(२) लोप्या (२) ॥ १ ॥ (हात् इकारात्() थकारवकारी परच(१) अवस्थिती खोयी भवतः ॥ मुखते मुमते(७)। दह्यते(८) दज्झते) । (१ विकसः विलो(११) जिका(१९) जिवा) ॥ ॥ 2 ॥ (१०)शवलेभ्यो व्यंजन(१५) ॥ २ ॥ भवलेभ्यः(११) परं१७) व्यंजनं लोप्यं भवति ॥ (१८)स्वयं मयं । सर) सगे। श्रोतव्यं सोतब्ब(११) । काव्यं कब २९) । पस्य(२९) सर्व। वि(२५) विलं । म्य(२४) समं । श्रुतं सुत(२५) । मेमा सिमा(२१) . ॥ ॥ 3 ॥ वर्ग(२१) ॥ ३ ॥ वर्ग(२८) च परे तल लोय(२९) भवति(२०) ॥ शन:(१९) । रत्तए) । D। दुग्ध दुई। वभि(२५) वेग्मि । दुई। वञ्चि(५) वेसि । (१बहू (५) (Agu () A STM (D BOTH (H) A om, comment prae to wani (el.D om., कारा। (() B परभावे स्थिती (6) B om., O D मुखार, मन्ना (C)A Bom. (e) A om., भर, भार, Dदार ॥ (3) Aom this example. (१९) Bपिको। (SP) A om. (IT) B forat ( D (२0 Badds खोप्यं ॥ (१) A रतो; B om. शव• to भवति । (८) The examples rearranged; their order in A is po PP, PE, PU, om. all the others; B how २१OD have १८, १९.२७, १०, ११, १२.११ com iii,). (0)AOचम,Be(corrupt for पोषE), Dोप (px) .D (PU) A fri, B, C D om. thin examp (०) Bom.) B बन्न (२२) By (YBODHRE (RUA, B (P) Bam भु। (२) B. ochut SMMANE ·॥ वनविधान बती ॥ पत्रो) (२)ख खग। षण्मुख बाहो( ) । श्रात्मा) अप्पा उत्पलं उप्पलं । सगावं समावं । 'मन्मथः वन्मयो ) । प्राप्तं पत्तं । प्रधुनः पनो)। त्रिर्कः अक्को। उता उता । भास्करः भक्खरो । B C DI बधा वन्हा(म) -॥ 4 ॥(९) वाद्यं ॥ ४ ॥ वाचं०) () परे लोप्यं भवति ॥ वृतः(११) वच्छो(१२) । (१३) बमा । संवत्सरः संवच्छरो । मत्सरः मछरो । अमरा:(१४) अच्छा। पित रच्छित(१५) ॥ ॥ 5 ॥ वर्गाद् अवयं ॥ ५ ॥ वर्गात् परं अवयं व्यंजनं लाप्यं भवति ॥ सौख्यं सुक्ख(१९) । (१२चक्रः, महो । (१७) लौवः कौवो । (१८) विध्वं मितं विद्धं मित(१८) । B C ॥ ॥ 6 ॥ (२०)शाच च पंचमी वा ॥ ६ ॥ वर्गपरः शपर व वर्गपंचमी वा लाप्यो भवति ॥ ज्ञानं माण(२१) । (२९)यजन्स(२९) लक्षण (२४) लक्षणों। (२५)लौ खच्छौ। C DI BCDI (१)कृष्ण कपडं॥ । * C कामः ॥ + यः॥ . . (1) BD U; A om. this and the following examples, except Nos. , 'and () B परनी पनी॥ (९) A पदभुतो। () A बमुजो, BH; BOI places (1) Bामः॥ (९) B माहो, C D बमो। () CDपो, ant addr:-बन्यो। (5) Aशाचा, B C D बंभा ॥ () AC D से, B से। (१०) BC Dada aai (१७Amar (१२) B बहो। (१२)A om. the remainder 1) B, D pytani (N). A B D T (RC) A UN, BDI (O)Bीषा कोला (15) Dreads पि विपिन सिर्ष (ace. sing. of fags शिक) BODEN()A OD 1, Bor# (PU) A B C D are (neome I Bw (20), B ·बनविधान बतीय 170 दो १ ॥७॥ इकारो (वकारे परे खोप्यो वा भवति ॥ दारं पारं। वेति कि। रा) ॥ ॥8॥ षाट्टः ॥८॥ पकारात् परष् टकारो वा(७) लोप्यो भवति ॥ उत्कष्टं उबोस) (स्पष्ट फुट) ॥ (८)पुढे । (६)उक्किट्ठ । ॥ 9 ॥ (१०)रेफः पूर्वश् च ॥ ८ ॥ (११)स स्माद् व्यंजनात् परः पूर्वम्यश(१९) च रेफो लोप्यो भवति ॥ तो तकं । अर्क:(९९) अको। मूर्खः मुक्खो(१४) । (१५)न्ययोधः निग्गोहो(१) । स्वर्ग सग्ग। भौधः सिग्यो १७) । अर्घः अग्घो१८)। अर्चन(१९) अक्षणं। वर्ष वज(२०)। दुर्जनः दुजणो। उनः उट्टो(२१) । सुवर्ण सुवलं । शत्रुः मन्नूर) । कर्तव्यं का- तव्य(२२)। कर्दमं कद्दमं । ऊङ्घ (२४) उड् (२५।। प्रवरः(२९) पवरो(२०) C D। सर्पः सप्पो । विभ्रमः विनमो। दर्भः दभो । प्राचं अंव(२८)। धर्मः धम्मो । पर्यः सुनो। प्रतं वत(२८) । पर्वतः पव्वतो(९०) । श्रुतं सुत(२१) । इखः इमो । C D॥ ॐ (१) C D addu (२) D बकारपरे। (२) BहाCD add देर कुपार। (७) B Com. (u) C D UP (see iii, 29 and App. C D in iii, 3), B vart (() B मुई; C D om. the remainder. () B कडं ( ? पुर) (८) A om., Bplaces 5, 0. (e) A om.; Bofur, repeating card before it. (•) B om. the sutra; A tam, CD रेफ (१९) Bom. commentary, up to भवति ॥ (१२) D पूर्व पर (१७-A om. this example ; D places it before (४) A मूछो, B भूयो (11)A om the remainder. (१९) C D fu॥ (१७) B गौग्यो । (१E) Dadds बायो। (२) B om., up to mh incl. (१०) D repeats wi॥ (११) को, C add TFT TTUTN (**) B*• (PP) B C D 97**, and place this txample before the preceding one. (२४) B पोर्न, CD ; but C basa margiu correction in pencil at (१५) B गेहूं, Cr, D'उहूं। (१), marginal correction in pencil TC # (P) B बरो, पचणे) BR DMR.H.C#as).' () B, ODI (९:)BOD (80 B; OD ·॥ जनविधान जती ॥ [Im, 10-18 10 (चीमय ॥१॥ न जईये व्यंजनादेशास ते असंयोगस्य भवति ॥ दहं परं । सा(३) भो॥ ॥11॥ प्रथमदितीययोर् द्वितीयचतुर्थों ॥ ११ ॥ वाणं प्रथमद्वितीययोः स्थाने थथासंख्यं द्वितीयचतुर्थों अदिौर) भवतः ॥ भास्करः भक्खरो। निश्चयः निच्छयो) । (५)दुई दुटु'(६) । (साभ: थंभो०)। परुष(८) फरस) । विक्षयते (१०) विज्झते (११) । (दंशा दाढा(१२) मथुरा मधुरा(ए) । नाथः माधो(१४) ॥ ॥॥॥ CD ॥ ११ ॥ ॥ 12॥ प्रथमस्य हतीयः ॥ १२ ॥ (14)प्रथम स्थाने बतौयो भवति ॥ एक एगे। तीर्थकर: (१९) तित्यगरो(७) । पिशाची पिसाजौं। जटा जडा। कृतं कद(१८) । प्रति- पिडू पडिसिद्धा) । C D | (९)प्रक्ष्ये बुच्छे । ॥18॥हो (२१)खघधभानां ॥ १३ ॥ २)खकार पकारधकारभकाराण(२९) स्थाने इकारो भवति२४) ॥ (1) C D om. this sutra and its commentary. (२) Art, B संभो ॥ ().B. Dom. (8) A farge, B forwar, CANT, D foul () A om. this example. (OCD (0) Dadds संभो (see iii, 10, 19). (८) A B C पुरष, D पुरषः KRA पुरस, B पुरस, C परिस, D परिसो; BO D add मु मुई (see it, 18). (१०) चिय, B विजयने, C D विपते(११) A B विनर, Dire; H... AT, and as to any for , see p. 20 footnote 28 ; p. 10, n.7; p. 27, n. 18 ; p. 80, (१२) BI, दाड़ा, DETI (१VA B C D मरा(१३) MB OD read NTFETT OTTH (TU) A has only the following comment, i ferat; om. all the reat, () BAG (0) B Pranth D (15) B (1) Bultetu (**) Confectural; BODO (१00 Damalne rots ein ii, II) (NOPorn A Dolpomm., up to . SAEKOM ·III,14--17.] ॥ जनविधान जातीय सुई। (मेघः मेहो। (मधवः महयो। समार) बमो॥ मख) सहा:(५) ॥ १४ ॥ (१)सकारख स्थाने खछहा(१) भवंति ॥ भिक्षा लिखा। पाणुक हनुहो) । पाषाणः पाहाणो । रख दह ॥ ॥ 15। यसबः ॥ १५ ॥ ()यकारस्य स्थाने जकारो भवति ॥ यौवनं जुषणं । सूर्यः सुनो। ॥ 16.0CD|| १५ ॥ , ॥ 16 ॥ तवर्गस्य चटवग्गौं ॥ १६ ॥ तवर्गस्य स्थाने घटवौं भवतः(१०)। यथासंख्यं ॥ नित्यं नि१५)। (१)पथ्यं पच्छ (१९) । विद्या विचा। (२)बंध्या वंझा(१५)। मृत्यं नहर) । स्थितः ठितो(१५) । (१९)दंडः डंडो(१७) । दग्धः(१८) रड्डो(८)। C D । धान्य धक(२०)। CD ॥ ॥ 17 ॥ युभदो यस्य (२१तः ॥ १७ ॥ युभसंबंधिनो यकारस्य (११)तकारो भवति(१९) ॥ तुहिएर) ॥ ॥ 17.1 CD॥ १७ ॥ (1) O Dom. this example (see p. 26, note in iii, 11). (B) A om. this example.. (U) A B ETHTH (8) BOTTI (2) A ३०॥ (1) A has obly. पर पायो पाता। दमद, om. the rest. (0) B पर। (८) B DEम (DA only was om. the whole commentary. (१.) A only स्पाई, om. upto भयत. (११)CD पि। (१२) Bur with Skr. पंचा। (१२) BD originally put, with marginal correction (1) CD (IU A few BOD ()A om, the remainder. (10) B (IT, DI पाय। (10 Bो, कोयो। (१०) B , Dथा। (HOBHA to #fun Art, B grafit; C D add tº ·"चजनाविधान ।। 48. गाणा) मा. ॥ १८ ॥ रेफमकारवकाराण(५) स्वाने (मकारो भवति । धिर(५) (मायो ससौ )। आमिषं शामिसं(७) ॥ ॥ 19॥ इजथानों रनखा:(5) ॥ १८ ॥ (हजथानी खाने रमखा(८) भवति । यथामख्या) ॥ 'रई घरं । ज्ञान मान(१)| CDI (O)स्तंभ:(११) खंभो॥ ॥20॥ गरहाण घणया:२९) ॥ २० ॥ (१९)गरहाणां स्थाने घणमा(१४) भवति । यथासंख्य ॥ (सहं घरं । करवीरः(१५) कणवी(१५) | C D । (७)वाह्यः वज्यो(११) | C D ॥ ॥21॥ महाना(१०) वलभाः १८) (१)मडहानां स्थाने(२०) यथाक्रम वलभा भवंति(११)॥ मन्मथ (२१) वस्मयो(२१) । षोडश(२४) सोलम(२५) । (७)जिहा जिन्ना। C D ॥ ॥22॥ (२६)यवयोर व्यत्यासः ॥ २२ ॥ (१०)यकारवकारयोर् व्यत्यामा(२८) भवति(२८) ॥ पर्यंकः पलंको(१०)। . (९) B •it॥ (९) A only एषां ॥ (२) BOसकारप०॥ (४) A सस् स्यात् ॥ (१) B fur (0) B veti () A om. this example. (5) CD TV || (e) B CD. om this clause. (१०) B नामं, C D ॥ (११) D स्थभः (Prakrit भो, see ii, II) (१२) A पनसा, B •सा, Dr.॥ (१५) A only यथासंघ भवंति पाई। (१५) Burer, D. VIHTN (१५) A वीरं॥ (१९) B बन्यो। (१७) A B C D ON: htCwith marginal correction oat (१८) B॥ (१९) D.हारा; but BO जानो। (१०) BD om. (९१) A only सई, om. up to भवति ॥ . (२२) A B यो (VACTET, Bawal, Danो॥ (२५) BD •n:, ABT for en (२५) में KARNO SOA; om. sutre CD read पवयोर् (२७) So A; Bअयोस पायो, see below. note rec. (१८). यवयं । (१९) या ODI the example yra pre (sto iü, 12 in App. CP), after which como Forwhich are assigned पका BD add me ·IIT 28-25] जनविधानंती (बुर (aदूध:(१) बेरुलियो(१) । पयोदन तेरह । हयोर(५) लोपे नणमानाम् अधो (९) होऽपदादौ०) खिताना ॥२६॥ गणमानां. संबंधिनौ यो महो(च) तयोर लोपे कारागमो भवति होऽपदादाववस्थितानां ॥ प्रश्नः पन्हो(११) । कृष्णा तहार) वसमा जन्हा(१) । B C DI C DI (१)यहाति गिपहनि()। पतिः वन्दौर)। जिह्याः जिन्हो(१७) । B । (१८)अपदादाव् इति किं । मचान(१८) मसामं ॥ । ॥ 24 ॥ लोपे द्वित्वं ॥ २४॥ संयोगाक्षरस्य लोपेऽवशेषस्य(१०) दित्वं भवति(२१), (२२) दुर्गा दुग्गा B C D | व्याघ्रः बग्घो॥ ।। 25 ॥ (२२'क्वचिद् अलोपे ऽपि ॥ २५ ॥ (२४)कचिद् अलोपेऽपि द्वित्वं भवति ॥ न जायते म(१५) मन्नते१)। (१)वाध्यते वाहिजते(२०) । (1) A om. this example. (२) C D बैडः॥ (२) B वे दुनियो, पक्षियो,D hafov (H)D TOTAL () So B; A OD goll (Ⓡ) A om. ir. (of Conjectural; the MSS reading is corrupt; B. throws sútra and commentary into one and reads मो. नए पो पदावस्थामा भवति ; A has sपादावस्थानानां; C originally पदावस्थामानो, corrected in margin to- ऽपदादावम्यामाना; D पदादावखानाना। (E) AC D कारसकारी। (e) Bom. this clause. (१०) Conjectural ; A D read: पदादारस्थानाना, पदावस्थामाना। (११) C D पाये। (1P) B PTTTT.; A adde बमा कमी (see App. B C D). (१९) A D ना. (१४) A om. the remainder, up to mपदादा (१५) B मामि, C D मिपार ॥ (१) C D बातो; Bplaon this example after मिन्दाविया (see App. B). (१०) C D place the examples thuai २१.० १५.११, १३.१०. (१८) So CBA पाविति, Bअपादानित,Dपाल QQ BOD W* (R)D fuller; B adds after it. A (Aसानु (NOD: दुनो। ROA.om. the sātra. (२३) B कपिराशे ep AB .CP, CD add. ACT .

·॥राजनाविमन FIL964-20 । 26 ॥ सिन् वितीय चतुर्थयो: (१) प्रथमस्तीयौ ।। तस्मिन् दिवे वर्तमानयोर दितीयचतुर्थयोःखाने) भवतः ॥ सौखं सुक्ख(३) । (अर्थ: अग्यो । पथ्यं पच्च(५) । पाय) मज्यो०)। घडः छट्टो)। घरः वुड्डो)। पार्थः पत्यो) । वर्धमानः एमानो(११)। पुष्यं पुष्कं। जिला जिला(१९) ॥ ।।27 ॥ एवान्येषां ॥ २७ ॥ ॥ अन्येषां (१९)मुक्कामुक्तविशेषाणं द्वित्वे स एव भवति ॥ (१)अर्कः पक्षो। सत्य स(१५) | B C D || ॥ 28 ॥ न प्रदादौर) ॥ २८ ॥ पदादौ १) द्वित्वं न भवति ॥ क्रोधः कोहो । (१८)क्षुद्रः खुद्दो(१८) । (पदादाव् इति किं । (२१)भद्रः भद्दो(१९) ॥ ॥ 29 ॥ कचिद् अन्यचापि ॥ २८ ॥ कचित् पदमध्येऽवसाने(२९) च लोपे कृते दिवं न भवति । कास्यप (२५), कासवो । (१)वैश्रवणः बेमवणो(२५)। स्पष्र्ट(२९) फुट(२०) । (२८)कर्तव्य (NAVतुर्यायोभ, B • चतुर्थी । (२) So B; B संयोगात्; C D संयोगा। 10) A (for सोपवं? but see iii, 5). (४) A om. the remainder. (५) B.प; *o also O now; but originally C seems to have bad en (C) DATT () D.मा, B सम्यो। (E) Bढो, Dसो॥ () Bो, हो, Dो। (१०)D (OBERमाणे, मायो, Dबमाणे (for बट्ट); but comp. App.A, 26 (as to oat for •st), and App. C D, i, 16. (१२) B जिहा । (१३). So A; Boriginally महापिसवाचा, but corrected by later band into विशेषा; the datter s also the readrag of C-D (e App. B C D). (**) BET BLOपादो। (१०) Badda अमनदो। (15) aom. this enmple, प, Day () BOपाडादा । (२)ANI, D.माई (Rd. SOCIAहा, BD (१७) Aथपर .

·I11, 30 ॥बनविधानसोध। । काता) । () सौ(९) । दोर्ष रोखो) योगोश्यारागमो.मध्ये ॥ ३ ॥ बचोर (व्यंजनयोर मध्ये रखरागमो भवति ॥ चमिः गणे) विशेषः विसलेमा(८) । (E) पखक्लो । (रवं रतण(१०)। वर्ष परिसीए। CD। सूर्यः सूरियो) । ()सर्षपः मरिसपो(५) । (१)वेदू: (34) बेदुखियो(१९) । (१)मा खिमा(१०) । (४)सूर्य मुडम(१८)। (प पदुमर CD॥ ॥ 31 ॥ थवचोर) इदुतौ ॥ ३१ ॥ यवयो:(२५) स्थाने (२२)इकारोकारौ भवतः ॥ योदा तेरह(रए) ।। CD। भवति होति(२५) ॥ ॥ 32 ॥ (२५)संख्यायाम (२९)तिशयोर लोपः ॥ ३२ ॥ (२०)संख्यायाः (२८) संबंधितिशयोर लोपो भवति(१९) ॥ (विशतिः वीसा । पंचाशत् पत्रा(११) ॥ ॥33॥तराच॥ ३३ ॥ (९) BOD काय; c adds वार। (२) A मौषों,B मौर्ष, OD (e) A सीसी, B सौसं॥ (8) A om, this example. (u) Boerd, OD ON (see iii. 8). (0) B repeats Tory after a u (01 Bपनि ()A विशेष (e) A om. this example ; B C D place it after afcêtu () BOD TOUR (११)A बरि(१२) AD हरिज, BC सरियो। (१९) Bom. this example , probably by oversight; as it is the only instance of B omitting what occur in AOD together. (१४) A B C D सरिसवो; OD add य (५) OP पूर्वः॥ (१) दुहित, B दुहियो, पहिलो, पक्षिण; O Dadasi (१०) 80 A; ODमा (१८) 8 OD; BSP (१८) B पOD (१०) परपोर। (1) BOD यकारववारयो (९) BODY (20ARKI Bom. by mistake, as it gives only भयो, omitting Trandar ( ) A BOWE; Dret furie); A B place the examples Pr, but OD RANDropersthi taru (२) Bf.n(R) Dom. (eyon (0) 4 (1) A om. all examples, probably by mistake, 600 ·॥जनविधान रती ॥ मस्यामबंधिनस् तकारस्य) पणपास ॥ लोपो भवति ॥ पंचायत ।। 34 || (कारतीययोः खरे ॥ ३४ ॥ ककारस्य वर्गवतीयस्य च स्वरे(८) परे लोपो भवति ॥ (काकिला(र बोरो)। (१९भौगिकः भोदो। (१९)राजी राई। ()प्रतिकूल पदकूसो) । भदौ मई(१४) । BIC D || ॥35॥ थत्वं वर्षे (१५) ॥ ३५॥ (१)ककारवर्गहतौययोर् अवर्षे परे यवं भवति ॥ C D । काकाः काया। नागा: माया(१७) | B C D॥ ॥ 36 ॥ शिष्टप्रयोगाद् व्यवस्था ॥ २६ ॥ व्यवस्था वर्भावस्थाम(२८) शिष्टप्रयोगात् ज्ञातव्या(१८) ॥ अर्कः असो । (सूर्यः सरियो(२९) । भिना भिक्खा । खमी लच्छौ ९) । C D ॥ ॥ 37 ॥ लोपो उपभ्रंशे (२२) उधो(२५) रेफस्य ॥ ३० ।। * . . (१/4.cm. (२) B C D तस्य । (३) B C D om. (8) सोपः, om. भवति । (1) Bामन, and prefixes विमति बौसा, repeating the latter by mistake from alhe prerious sutra. (() A परपास, B D परपणा, C परवया । (७) C D have an altogether different sútra and commentary, see App. C D. (5) Inserted; À B om te) This example also occurs in D (see App. C D), (१०) A कोमिक्षा (११) बोरा (१९) A om. this example. (११) B वनराजी गराई। (१४). sddeat पाइपो (MS. कूप पूष); B adds many more examples, see App, B. CD mit; A adds *variaat: # (C) So B; A corrüpt, सोप्यो खान पियरे पर रोए पलं खाद?); but C.D.ieed) aurently, ace App.CD (0) Deया। (() A.Bखाना (Skin BOD & om, the remainder. (pv) BOD gfial: (4) Hard op CD (RY.DONE STATE B'om (ENAM HAL AN PICHYA Arth.

·III, 38. 39-] ॥ जनविधान बतौर्य (अपोऽधो रेफस्य लोपो न भवति ॥ *वरचु(२) । ग्रामो(२) । (वाधो धमि(१) जादि॥ 11. 38 ॥ पैमाचिक्यां रणयो(१) लनौ ॥ ३८ ॥ पैशाचिक्यां रेफल्य सकारो भवति । णकारस्य मकारः ॥ बिले) अले लक्खमा पनमत(१०) (११)पनयिहितासा ॥ ॥ 3 ॥ मागधिकायां रसयोर लशौ(१२) ॥ ३८ ॥ मागधिकायां रेफसकारयोर लथौ(१९) अवतः ॥ (१)चंदकलनिकल इवति । (१५) । हंगे(१९) । पहले१०) || C D || ।।39" || CD ३२॥ ॥ (१८३१ ॥ २८ ॥ ३८ ॥ सूत्राण्य अत्र र ॥ ॥ III || इति श्रीचंडकृतप्राशतखक्षणे (२०)व्यंजनविधान (२१)हतीय (२२)समाप्तं ॥ ३ ॥ (२२)ति प्राकृतलक्षणं संपूर्ण(२४) ॥ * Ed. वरचं। पामः । व्याघ्रः पसिया याति || A and Com. the interpunctuation between to and Tº,B has it ; A B C have the interpunctuation betweon are and प्रसि.; D om. it throughout. + Ed. परे परे दुराराक्षसाः प्रणमत प्रणयिस्थितायाः॥ .. (९) B om. (२) B वरs, D वर ॥ (१) A गाज, B पाउ, O D प्रयो॥ (४) A om. this example, B व्याघ्रः, D व्याघ्रो; C D prefix the Skr. याघ्रः ॥ (५) C D अमि ॥ (O B om. (७) Bहोना। (E) Dबरे॥ (8)A दुरावनस्सा, B दुरक्वं । सखा, दुठसक्यसा, D दुहलत्वमा ॥ (१०) So C; A पनमत्, B पमनमनः, २पनमते ॥ (११) A रहिवासा om. पन, B पुनहिचासा, C पमई । विपासा, D पनई हिचासा, B explains it in the margin as Skr. gefamat: (sic), but the word is not distinctly legible. ' (१९) B ससौ। (१) B सशे ॥ (१४) A वन्दकलति कलवनि; B वन्दनी Tufaft; B in the margin explains far by the Skr. #itfa ; C D * दि। (१५) A मेसे, B सोसे; C D prefix the Skr. शेषः ॥ (१९) A B रमे, D om, CD.prefix the Skr. सः॥ (१०) A पछत, B पहने, C D om. (१८) B C D om. this. remark. (१९) A, B om. न(२०) C D read भाषांतर विधानं चतुर्थ, making this the termination of the fourth chapter ; their third chapter terminates with aútra 86 ; see App. C D. (PU) C778, DON' (PP) A om. (PⓇ) A B Domi this remark. .(२७) Here follow various dates in the MSS.; A माधव भाष पहनौ संवत् १८९५ संवत् १९९१ का; Cgives no date. .

·APPENDIX A, EXPLANATION. The MSS. C and D contain a large number of Sutras and Explanatory Remarks, in addition to the text given in the preceding pages. To a very slight extent this is also the case with the MSS. A and B. Some of this addi. tional matter is found only in one MS., some other in more than one. This is indicated by the heading letters of the Appendices ; thus Appendix CD gives what is common to the MSS. C and D. The places in the text to which these .. additions belong, are indicated by the insertion of corresponding letters ; thus, on p. 21, the letter A in the commentary to Sútra II, 25 refers to an additional • remark in MS. A, given in Appendix A on p. 34; again, on p. 5, the letters C D in Sútra 1, 6e refer to an additional Sútra in the MSS. C and D, given in Appendix C D, on p. 40. The words printed in red type in the Appendices refer to the words in the text, after which the additional remark is to be inserted. wwvwvvvvvvvvv vwvvw APPENDIX A. TO SUTRA II, 25. ON PAGE 21. सहि साजिमान(१) माहिण्यंत। MS framan (v MS. If y(); in A the two letters and to often indietinguishable, ·APPENDIX-B. APPENDIX B. TO SUTRA III, 23. ON PAGE 26. . जिन्हो । निवितं निन्हवियं(१) । निहविका मिन्हविया(१) ॥ TO SUTRA III, 34. ON PAGE 32. कोइलो ॥ (काको काई) । (नकुनः मउणो) । (१) प्रतिकूल: पर- जला()। काकेन कारण(०)। काकः कात्रो। भौगिकः भोरो। त्यागिना (८) चारण ८) । प्रगुणः पउणो। (१०) अवगूढः अवजढो। त्यागेन चाएण। त्यागः चात्रो। सुचिरं सुदरं । इचिः सुई। (११)प्रचुरेण पउरेण । पिशाचेन पिसाएण । पिशाचः पिसानो वनराजिफलं वणराइफला १९) । (१२)वनराजी वणराई । (१)प्रजुएं पउटुं। (१५)गजेन गएण। गजः गो(१५) । (१०)पतिमा परणा। गोमतो गोमई । (१८)जतुना जणा। (१८)वाल: वाजलो वातेन वारण । वातः वात्रो०)। मदिरः मदरो। (२१)नदौ मई पादुका पाउा। मदेन मएण । मदः मत्रो । कूपिका कूदा। कपौनां कईणं । (२१)नूपुरं नेउरं । रिपूर्ण रिजणं । कूपेन कूएण । कूपः कूत्रो(२९) कूवो(२९)। कविना करणा। कापुरुष कावुरिमा २२) काउरिम(२५)। रवेण रएण। देवः देत्रो(२५)। मयि मर(२९) । प्रयुत पउत्तं । मयूरः मऊरो। विप्रयोगः विप्पोत्रो०)। (1) Ms. fotofor (P) MS. faucazia (1) The MS. places this example after पौ। (४) This example also occurs in D (see App. C D). (1) MS. म भयो () MS. परयो। (७) MS. काकेर ॥ (८) MS. त्यागिनाः ॥ () MS. पा. । (१.) Ms. पवादः पवाड़ा। (११) Conjectural; MS. सरोग सार। (1) MS. •रावि.॥ (११) This example also occurs in A, omitting however MA (१४) MS. अधुर प्रज, and places it after गयो । (१५) MS. गावमा बायो। (1) MS. न. (१७) MS. prefixes the example सिन सि, which is repugnant to the following sutra (ii, 85). (१८) MS. तुना बंजरा (1) MB आधार (२०).MS. बाजा (P) This example also occurs in A. (**) 118 E! (Ru) MS. places २७, २९. (R) Ms. (R) MS. मई (e) Ms.at ·APPENDIX C. APPENDIX C. . SUTRA I, 11. ON PAGE 6. ॥11॥ कौवे असशसार १ ॥ ११ ॥ कौवे वर्तमानाम् नामः परयो: जमशः ई इत्य् प्रादेशो भवति ॥ *कमल९१) महवि अलिउलई करिगंडाईं महंति । त्रिसुलहम् एत्थ ण जाई भलि ते एवि दूर(१) गणेति ॥१॥ TO SUTRA II, 27. ON PAGE 22. भवति ॥ CD ॥ भे मणामो वयं भणामः । भे भण मां भण । भे भण असान् भण॥ भणामः॥ भे कयं मया कृत। भे कर्य अस्माभिः कृतं । भेणिकिटो.मत् निकृष्टः। भे तं णिचिट्ठो अस्मत् त्व) निःशष्टः। भे देसो मम देशः । भे देसो अस्माकं देशः । भेणिहिदं मयि निहितं । भेणिहिद अस्मास निहित ॥ • C मखामि मुक्का पलिकलानि करिगंहानि कांति । परमम् पर्ष मयेषां भोले मापि पर गमयति + O पसल । बस दुभि वा। कदा पो भवति ॥ C मशि। . Dise H.O. IV, 858. T. V. III, 4. 25. . (२) The Ms. has the marty of . intarpuno actuation (1) after each word of the first line ; thus pui MO. The Ms. Haas पितति । (i) MS. om, ·APPENDIXD. APPENDIX D. SUTRA II, 18. ON PAGE 13. 11.|| संस्कृतवत संधिकार्य पदयोः ॥ १ ॥ प्राकृते पदयोर् यत् संधिकार्य तत् संस्कृतोकवद् भवति ॥ SUTRAS II, 10. 10. ON PAGE 14. ॥ 1 ॥ स्वरस्योद्भते १) ॥ १ ॥ व्यंजनसंपृक. खरो यो(२) व्यंजने लुप्ते ऽवशिष्यते स उद्धृत रहोचते । खरस्योद्धृते खरे परे संधिर् न भवति ॥ गगनं गत्रणं । गंधकुटौ गंधउडी। ॥ 1 ॥ न युवर्णस्यास्वे ॥ १ ॥ दूवर्णस्य उवर्णस्य चाखे वणे परे संधिर् न भवति ॥ न वैरिवगै(१) अपि अवकामः । ण ()वेरिवग्गे वि वयासो ॥ TO SUTRA II, 14. ON PAGE 18. कहिचित् ॥ ऐदौतौ च केषांचिन् मते भवत एव ॥ कैतवं कैनवं । मौदर्य शौचरित्र। कौरवाः कौलवा कौरवा ॥ उौ) अपि खवयंसंयुकौ(९) भवत एव ॥ अहंकारः इदारो०)। अंजितं? अचि ॥ TO SUTRA II, 27. ON PAGE 22. अर्थः॥ एवं सर्वासु विभक्तिषु ॥ (OD ॥ ( D om. (O D वैरव। (४) D सम्मे() See App. Ap: (Dो and-at (6)हारो। (E) D विनित।

·APPENDICES B C AND C D.
APPENDIX BC.
TO SUTRA III, 5. ON PAGE 24
मितं ॥ आई
उडुं । प्राप्तं पत्नं ॥
APPENDIX CD.
TO SUTRA I, 1. ON PAGE 2.
देशी.
प्राकृतम् अनेकधा भवति । तद् यथा ।
Cadds the following declension of नक्ष- यन, मत्ता मात्र and लिप-मित्य
योजयारेजोवर्ण ॥ जयं । जया or जो नशेष or म जहि or मोति
'or myा असा हा or नशा॥ जयापी or as or arror सास्तिो or
बाबरिता ॥ माना or नमानसे or बसि। नपेड or बल एवं
or मनाs or मनामना। मनायो or रे मना मना
or मा or मनामनार माcि orat or मन्यामनार ।
समजाकिलो ममता or warमनार मचा or ARITA
शिपिपिपिसा यावत्।

·LIVE MER APPENDIX CD, पखरिपउरे) गामे रखपुलिंदाण सुभए महो। सह मजिन्नद चिची सहेण जह बोलए तुमौ ॥१॥ मित्सवीस(२) (खायण्यरपमरो जाव अन्नविच होई। (d)पडिहत्यबिंबगहवद्वयणे। ता वज्ज भत्तारं ॥ २ ॥ महाराष्ट्रदेशे । भातु । भेटु ॥ अंदेशे । वंटकमु । कूड ॥ कर्णटदथे । कूलु ॥ द्राविउदेशे । चोर ॥ इत्यादि ॥ TO SUTRA I, 3. ON PAGES 3, 4. कुलानि ॥ चत्वारि सत्तारि। चत्वारः चत्तारो। चतुरः पउरो(१)। तिष्ठति() चिटुंति पश्य(७) पेच्छ वा(७) । यूयं तुम्हे(८) । वयं अन्हे(८) ॥ भ्यम् ॥ ग्रामेभ्य:(९) गामाहितो । गुरुभ्यः(१) 'गुरूहितो(१०) । धेहितो। गई हितो। दोहितो वेहिता १९) । (५२)तोहितो ॥ अहेस ॥ **दोसुं दोस । विसं १९) वेस । तौसुं तौ ॥ TO SUTRA I, 5. ON PAGE 4. मरिताई गईणं पाई है। गुरूणं गुरूहं । बुद्धौणं (१४)बुद्धीह। महण(१५) महई । । ४ * C पलिंदास यात्रामा सदो शब्दः भारिपरे पजाप्रचुरे गामे यामे उमार धूयते। नर तथा चिमिः मजिजर सजाने जर यथा तुंगौ राषिः सुहेल मुखेन पोहए यतिका- मति + C तुंगौ रति । श्यामा तुंगो नमा नमो रति मामनिधामकोषागारे | ICसतबीस मोयपयरपसरो सप्तविंशनियोजनकरप्रसरः नाव यावत् अववि पद्यापिएन र भनति । परिणविगावरयर के प्रतिबिंबपतिवदने ना तावत् बच्न मन मचारंभतार। HC सत्तबौसंजोपर सब्दमे चन्द्रः। तस्य कराण प्रसरः चंद्रकरप्रमरः । || प्रति तिखा वि र यस्य स प्रनिर्षियः । प्रनिहलविता प्रतिश् चंद्र तिबोधन । TC मामेभ्यः । गुरुभ्यः । धेनुभ्यः । नदीभ्यः । दाभ्यां । विभ्यः ॥ '.. दोस। हिपये प् (see ii, 12)। बाद पार्य (iii, 5 दि-तुप)। खरोऽन्यो• (ii, 4 दोहप) । बदाममो. (ii, 11 दोछ)। पमुखारी• (i, 15 दो)। # हुँ। हि-पये सुप् (see ii, 12)। गयें (iii, 8 विद्यपsic!)। खरो. (ii, 4 बेहप)। बदाममो• (ii, 11 वेह)। पवारो. (ii, 15 ). Itorयो । विषु । (1) D भारिपरे। (२) D सनीष c. m. (२) Dोष. D ft (x) D TOIT # (D farfar, Com. (0) Com. (ED te) Com. (.)D स्तिो । (११) D•(१९) D नास्तिो। । (४) D. (१५) मधु - ·APPENDIX C D 2- । तुम्हाणं ॥ अन्हाणं अन्हाई.। (णमो परहंताणी । णमा सिद्धाण । (णमो पाइरियाणं । (२)णमो उवमायाणं| । यमो लाए सम्बसाइणं ॥ TO SUTRA I, 6. ON PAGE 5. भवति ॥ दोएडं घेण्ह(१) । तिएहं । चउपहं ॥ SUTRA I, BA. ON PAGE 5. ॥6॥टी णः ॥ ६ ॥ ॥ लिंगात् परष् टा इत्यस्य(५) ण श्रादेशो भवति ॥ देवेण । गुरुणा । मजणा । दहिणा । सिरेण । इत्यादि(५) ॥ . TO SUTRA I, 7. ON PAGE 5. गामेहिं ॥ **गुरूहि(७) । "ईहिं । तुम्हेहि(८) । अन्तेहिं । दोहि(द) बेहि। तौहिं॥ मदीनां । गुरूणां । बुद्धीनां । मधूनां । चस्माकं ॥ + C समो परहंताएं नमोऽहंसा। नमोईन (१०) चतुझे बहुवचनम धये भ्यम् । मवर्गस्य० (iii, 16 मा अईल )। एदोद्र (ii, 10 एमयो पईत् ) । खराश० (ii, 1 पामो पईस्)। वर्णविश्लेषं कृत्वा ई इत्य् अस्य र इनि स्थित। संयोगस्ये. (iii, 30 गमो धरहत्)। चनखारा० (ii, 15 शो परहंत्) । बदा- मम• (ii, 11 णमो पर इंस)। षष्ठीवच (ii, 13)। सागमस्या. (ii, 5 णमो परतण)। परो. (ii, 4 एमो पर इंताण)। अनुखारो• (ii, 15 णमो धरहता) ॥ ICसिडाणं। सिडेभ्यः ॥ FC आइरिचाणं चाचार्यभ्यः । चाचार्य । कगचज. (iii, 34 चाचार्य)। खरो. (ii, 4) इत्यमेन पा स्थाने र भवति (चार्य)। वर्णविश्लेष क्षत्वा संयोगस्येष्ठ० (iii, 30 पारिय)। खरो. (ii, 4 चाइरिया)। चाम् अस्य मा (i, 5 पाररियाण)। अमखारो० (ii, 16 पाइरिया)। ||Cउबझायाएं उपाध्यायेभ्यः । उपाध्याय । प्रथमम्य० (iii, 12 ज्वाध्याय)। धर्माद (ii, 5 ज्वाधाय)। नवर्गल० (iii, 16 स्वाभाय)। लोपे० (iii, 24) मस्मिन् (i, 26 उपाभाय )। अखत्वं (ii, ३ उवमाय)। खरो• (ii, 4 अजमाया)। : (i, 5 उवभायाण)। अनु खारो० (ii, 15 अवमाया)। उवमाया सिद्ध । पनमो सो सर्वसाधुभ्यः ॥ ** C गुरभिः । मदौभिः । युभाभिः । स्माभिः । हाभ्यां । पिभिः ॥ th c दोष द्विषोभ्या । हिण्य बळवयवं ( sic) शेयं (ii, 12 कि-भिस्) । बाद. (iii, 5 दिभिस् )। सरी (i, 4 दोभिम् )। सिंभिसः (i, दोषि)। . (९) Cadds मा परिसंता। एमो परमा॥ (२) Cadds समो पाइरिचा Cadds मा उमाचार। (४) ० ० ) D reads only u for त्य, (0) Dam (O) DATEN (5) D graft and who (c) C adds Erft नौषि तौषित (0) चतुष्यवाचनम् ॥

·APPENDIX QD. SUTRA I, 104. ON PAGE 6. ॥ 10. ॥ द्विभिशब्दाभ्यां जमथसोर णिः ॥ १० ॥ दुलि विखि दुवे दो वे । तिलि(१) । (२)एवं योऽपि ॥ TO SUTRA I, 18. ON PAGE 7. मोहा॥ ()चकारग्रहणात् किं। प्रकारात् परस्य उमः हिलमकार एवं भवति न तु णो॥ TO SUTRA I, 19. ON PAGE 9. C D read the Sutra : तं तुं(४) वंतु तुहं तुम सौ मविभोः ॥ TO SUTRA I, 20. ON PAGE 9. C D read the Sutra : अमि तुए तुम तं ॥ TO SUTRA I, 24. ON PAGE 10. निकवतो ॥ (तुम्हेहिता अन्() धिट्टा(१) । युमद् वयं घटाः ॥ SUTRAS I, 254, 256. ON PAGE 11. ॥25॥ तुम्हम् श्रामि ॥ २५ ॥ युभदः श्रामि परे तुम्हम् श्रादेशो भवति । सविभक्तः ॥ तुम्हें पिया ते गुणा । युमाकम् एव ते ॥23॥ तद डौ ॥ २५ ॥ मविभः ॥ ति(८)। तुम्हमि॥ तुम्हेसु() ॥ गुणाः॥ । • दुवे। को। पविश्वेष हला दुवा रनि स्थिती। संयोगस्प्रेष्ट (iii, 30) इत्यनेन प्रत्यय भागमः (दुगौ)। सरो० (ii, 4) इत्यनेन वा इत्यस्य वे भवति (दु) + विष। वार्थ पिय-चेया (i, 17)। EC सर अयि सिहरूपं । वाद (iii, 5 यि)। बज. (ifi, 34 र)। नरसि ॥ SC युभद। युष्मदो० (iii, 17 तुम । रमपात We (in, 18 तुलाद)। वर्ग (ii, ४ तुमद)। मस्योर(iii, 23 तुलाद)। बदाममा (ii, 11) इत्य् धनेन दवारस्य सोपा (तुन्न)। एमिरे (i, 14 तुम्हम्मि) । (VD placos for fe after a transfo ! () C repeats gfa, eto., instead of the remark the tesfall () Dreads 47<a, om. fots Com. the whole of: this remark in the test, but add it in the marginal gloss ; D gives it as part of the tert. ()CEL (1).D. (Dola (6) om Here follows sútra ii, 20(see p. 21) in C D.

·APPENDIX C D SUTRAS I, 264-264. ON PAGE 11. 128 || अहं (१)सौ मविभक्तः ॥ २६ ॥ अम्मदः सौ परे इ(१) ई अहं एते(१) श्रादेशा भवंति । मविभो:(१) (१)इमो परो() । तेण ई विडो। अहं कयपणामो* ॥ ॥ 26 ॥ अम्हे जसि ॥ २६ ॥ अस्मदो जसि परे अन्हे मवति । सविभतः ॥ अम्हे मणुस्सा() सूरा । वयं ममुख्याः शरा :॥ ॥ 26° ॥ मम् श्रमि ॥ २६ ॥ अस्मदः अमि परे मम् श्रादेशो भवति । मविभक्त:(१) ॥ में पेच्छ ॥ मां * पभ्य॥ ॥ 26 ॥ अन्हे शसि(१०) ॥ २६ ॥ अस्मदः शमि(१०) परे अन्हे भवति। मविभक्त :(११) । अम्हे पेच्छ । अस्मान SUTRA I, 31a. ON PAGE 12. 181 ॥ (१२)मद ङौ ॥ ३१ ॥ (मविभः ॥ मि(१२) । अहम्पि(१४) (१४) अन्हेस(१५) बयामा इतप्रणामः + मर। मयि । कमचज (iii, 34) इति मर सिड। httplaces at after सवि०॥ (२) DEn (३) c om. (४) 0 D place सवि. koir (1) D प (() D मरो। (७) C माणुस्खा ॥ (८) C सराः॥ (6) place are before पमि। (१०) D भि। (११) C D place rite before e Com. sútra. (w Day (18) Dom. (16) Here follows aútra Alcorpi22) in O.D.

·APPENDIX CD. "TO SUTRA II, 5. ON PAGE 15. रियं ॥ पनि रो) । दृषभः बसही 'महा) रियो । त्यनि- शब्दस्याष्टादश रूपाणि भवति ॥ भिचाई भुनमाई भया)। विहस्मई बुहाई वहस्मई। भित्रफई भुषप्फई भयका) । विहफाई (१) बुहप्फई वहप्फई । भित्रपई (७) भुअप भयप्पई (८) विहप्पई बुहप्पई वहप्पई) ॥ सदृक् वर्मः सिरिवलो । सहक रूप. मरिक्वो। मदृशः मरिसो । सदृक्षः मरिच्छो । एतादृशः एत्रा- रिलो । भवादृशः भवारिसो। यादृशः जारिसो। तादृशः तारिखो। कौदृशः केरिसो। ईदृशः(१०) एलिसा(११) । अन्यादृशः अलारिखो। अस्मादृशः अन्हारियो । युमादृशः तुन्हारिसो । इत्यादि । TO SUTRA II, 9. ON PAGE 16. कउला ॥ सौधं मउहं । मौनं मउ । पौरुषं परिमं ॥ TO SUTRA II, 11. ON PAGE 17. मरि० ॥ पडिवयाएं । यत् । तत् तं ॥ • Cषभः । खरा. (ii, 5) इत्यमेन इत्यस्य ७ (बुपमः)। कमचन. (iii, 84) रत्यनेन वकारस्य लोपः। ७ स्थितं (उषभः)। रमषा• (iii, 18 सभः)। (iii, 13 उस)। रोद्र (ii, 10 उसयो)। सरार्श. (ii, 1 महो)। + C स्पतिः। सरा• (ii, 6 वि०)। पक्ोर (iii, 22 पिड०). प्रथम(iii, 11 फिर.)। पुनः प्रथम. (iii, 11. मि.)। हवारस्य खरस्थ विखेषे बने इति स्थिसं (भिच०)। बदाममो. (ii, 11) त्यमेन सोपः (भिप.)। सबनेभ्यो. (iii, 2 भिषसतिः) । सोपे. (iii, 24 भिवसतिः)। कचज. (iii, 4 भिचारः)। सरो(ii, 4 भिषा)। रदोष (ii, 10 भिवस)। भिमानि सिम tC सावः। खरा. (i, 5 सदिक.)। तवर्ग (iii, 16 सारिक)। माता (iii, 21 सहि.)। रलवार(iii, 22सरिक)। पदाममा (i. 11 छरि-ब)। रेफ. (iii, 9 सरिवरः)। सोपे. (iii, 24 सरिवः)। दो (ii, 10 मारिवाना)। खरा• (ii, 1 सरिबो) C प्रतिपत् । बदाममः ॥ (दि, DT (२) को, Dो () D om. (s) C places this attar (1) C places thin atter बुहप्पाई (OD places this atter or (0) D has again in the following forms, instead of all (5) places the atter बुराईOD repeate पर। (१)D TRE (te) $6 both or ·APPENDIX C D कार्य । सम्यक्() सर्प २) । रेषत) ईसं ॥ मिरे ॥ सिराण ॥ TO SUTRA II, 12. ON PAGE 17. Commentary : सर्वामां स्थादौनां त्यादौनां च दिवचन बहु० ॥ वंभ. ॥ यिणा । मोहते ॥ SUTRAS II, 134, 136. ON PAGE 17. ॥ 13 ॥ प्रथमाया द्वितीया पार्षे ॥ १३ ॥ चतुर्विशतिर् अपि जिनवराः। चउवौस वि जिणवरा तित्थयरा) मे पनौतु ॥ ॥सप्तम्याम् बतीया पार्षे ॥ १३ ॥ तेषं कालेणं तेणं समएणं । तस्मिन् काले तस्मिन् समये(५) SUTRA II, 14. ON PAGE 18. ॥ 14 ॥ न सुतङनत्राः ॥ १४ ॥ मुता वर्णः उकारनकारत्रकाराश् च प्राचते न भवति ॥ लोकः । ए भी स्वरौ ततः पशात् स का स्वस्थ चतुःखराः । १. उसनषा:(६) संति प्राकृते नैव कर्डिचित् ॥ १ ॥ (D) ॥ ॥ 130 ॥ मिर । (मिर)॥ + C भयो । शोभेमे ॥ C ऐसी खरी । गाथा(१)। नौस बिजाई सतसा सराहा भणिया। चत्तारि य जोगवा पसौ(७) मूलवमा पो॥१॥ विरत। मामलम | भउषधभ। नरदगव। ठयवा(८)। पटकप | मषस ॥ ३९॥ पापा । उकजा पाला। एएए ऐऐऐ। पोवोचो बोधचिः ॥२०॥ साप्यायचा() ॥ ४ ॥ १४(१०) मूलवा भवति संस्का(११)। प्रायने ५५ भवति ॥ इति संवाषने(१२)॥ 60 इति विसर्जनौयः। (१)कार पाररार्थः । कुमारीतनयमहा- इतिर पर्चा विसर्जनीयसंजो भवति । मब वाहवयास पाक्षिकाकुचामबोचवत् धन्यसर्पस (१७) पिसोऽयम् इति श्रतः। D.Com (२) Bon Com., D. (*) D foru. U Soe "gavati (ed. Weber) p. 280, Kalpasútra (ed. Jacobi) p. 88. (0.00 गे। (क) पण्डबा (O MS. indistinct, : for u (१) AWO.Creverss शाखा पखते। See H. c. ii, 208, 199. (Vc (80) Oविसका ·APPENDCE OD. TO SUTRA II, 15. ON PAGE 18. महानिः ॥ कचिद् अहानुखारोऽपि भवति ॥ "सकतं ॥ महारो वौसा । तौमा । खोप ॥ भंगो ॥ देवेहिं । प्रकृति ॥ देवेहि। खोप ॥ देवेहि । (अर्द्धानुसार())॥ ॥ SUTRA II, 19. ON PAGE 19. ॥ 19 ॥ तु ता था हुनु बण तुत्राण श्री वि प्पिणु वेप्पिणु पूर्व ० ॥ १३ ॥ भोत्तूण ॥ काउाण । वंदेवि ॥ कप्पि | वंदेप्पिणु(९) । पणवेप्पिणु ॥ TO SUTRA II, 20. ON PAGE 20. फडिल्लो ॥ बोकार)। (७)वतार मतार् (दस साल श्रापूरा मणः । वत्तो मामत्त दत्ता(१) च यथा लक्ष्यं दम(१) मताः ॥१॥ शोभवान् साहिलो । विकारवान् विपारुषो । अथावान महाखो। वेहवान् पोहालू । गळवान् गविरो । धनवान् धणमणो धणवत्तो । हनुमान् हणुमा हणुमत्तो। पुण्यवान् पुलमत्तो । मानवान् माणदत्तो(८) । काव्यवान कव्वदूसो(८) ॥ तत्रभवेऽपि दल उल्लौ ॥ पामे भवः गामिझो। पुरे भवः पुरिखो ॥ अधो भवः । अधो हेड(६) । अधः स्थाने हेट्टादेशो() भवति । हेडिल्लो) ॥ उपरि भवः उवरिलो । प्रात्मनि भवः अपुल्लो ॥ SUTRA II, 21. ON PAGE 20. 1.21 ॥तातावजा जावाम तावद्यावताः ॥ २१ ॥ ॥ .Cसंहारः॥ (NOD om. (२) D.. (९) Com. (0) Oreads at खाने, and makes it to bo & now shtra (1) D reads Tu for rea (0) ODTU D inwerte numbers after each saffis, thus V NUR, ete ;" supermend 'them, thus sm, ste. (a) Dो। (00 कि ·Jai APPENDEX- ODI नाव हदख बावच्छब्दस्य तु तातावौ वालावौ भवतः ॥ गाथा । २० TO SUTRA II, 24. ON PAGE 21. भवति ॥.गाथा। *गुरुलडअपयवाणं तग्गुणमुख इवेद सम्बेसि । छुहिअतिमित्राण भोव्नं जलपाणं तं अमुलं रख ॥ १॥ TO SUTRA II, 26. ON PAGE 21. भवति ॥ भे निमयत ॥ भे भणामि । खां भणामि ॥ कृतं ॥ भे कयं युभाभिः कृतं । भे अहं णिक्किट्ठो(१) वं अहं निकृष्टः । भे अहं सूरो युमद् अहं शरः(२) । भे देसा तव देशः । भे देसो युमाकं देशः । भे णिहिदं त्वयि निहितं । भे णिहिटं यशाम निहितं॥ TO SUTRA II, 27. ON PAGE 22. भवति ॥ भे भणामि । अहं भणमि ॥ SUTRAS II, 278-27. ON PAGE 22. 2. ॥ इजेराः पादपूरणे(२) ॥ २० ॥ 27 || जि अव्ययं एवार्थ ॥ २० ॥ 1 27 ॥ पवरि पानंतीर्थे() ॥ २७ ॥ ॥27॥ एवरु केवलार्थ(५) ॥ २७ ॥ ॥ 7 ॥ यह कुडु(६) ॥ २० ॥ मुपदाचीना जारमा भवति सर्वां। बुधिनवितानां भी बसपा (गई W Doहो । (२)ODEI () See H. C. II, SAV (OSee R.C.I, res: (osa H.CITOSer:CAV,422,10% RRE FANARTA ·APPENDIX OD, ॥27 यूपू सिंह कुहाथों ॥ २० ॥ ॥ १॥ दखव१) भौघार्थे ॥ २७ ॥ 'दरबाड (१) होर विहाणु ॥ ॥27॥ अतिरभसाद् ऊर्द्धमुखस्येतस्ततो गमने उवडव ॥ २० ॥ उवडव परियाए॥ ॥27॥ उ णाडू णाव(२) जणि जण मण दवाथै ॥ २७ ॥ (मिव पिव विव व व विनवार्थे वा भवति ॥ ॥27॥ दाणिं एहिं ५) एत्तहे एवहिं दानौमः ॥ २७ ।। ॥27॥ यथा तथा अनयोः स्थाने जिमतिमौ ॥२०॥ दोहा() कालु लदेविणु जोइया (जिम जिम मौज(८) गले । (तिम तिम दंगण(१०) लहदू जो(११) णियमें१९) अप्यु(११) मुणे ॥१॥ । . SUTRA II, 298. ॥ 29" || नो दु: ॥ २४ ॥ • मौनं (भवति) विमानं ॥ (दोहा)। डोसा मर(१४) तुऊँ(१४) वारिचा मा कुरा मात्र) सिहर(१५) गमिसौरतडी दडबड(१) और विभाए ॥१॥ मा प्रा नायकं प्रतिप्राधिन नायिका प्रार(१९)। डोसा नायक मया पारिता दस मान दर्थ मानिया राचिर गमिष्यति। दरबा(१) मौ विभातं ममान (१०) (भवति) + कासं (सब्बा नायायाः) यथा यथा मेर: महति । तथा नया र समते (यावत् नियमेन चात्मानं (मन्यते)। (दरर। (२) Dसावयर (2) Seo H. C. IV, 444. (४) Com. the commentary. () DVI () Com., D गाथा। (0) D जिमि मिमि । (MOD मोर (OD तिमि सिम ॥ (१.)D देस। (११) नोगे, Dीboth con. met:) ( W.DA (1) DC. m. (tx) C ** Os c. m. (1x) O fore; horst ashort, metri cauray शिर see Vr. 5, 22. (LOC नवा NTI - ·APPENDIX 0.D. ॥ HA । खरात् परस्य असंयुकाय अनादेर् नय प्रायो रो भवति ॥ संहनने संहसणं संघर्ष महणणं ॥ TO SUTRA III, 8. ON PAGE 23. रत्नं ॥ स्पष्टं फुडं । स्पष्ट(९) पु१२) । उत्क उचिट्ठ(२) । नष्टः पट्टो(२) । दुष्टः दुहो( ) । सुष्टः सुट्ठो(२) ॥ TO SUTRA III, 6. ON PAGE 24. लकी तौक्षणं तिक्वं । आत्मा श्रादा पाया अत्ता(५) अल्ला । सर्वशः सम्वभू) ॥ वेति किं । वधि वेमि॥ TO SUTRA III, 9. ON PAGE 25. पवरो ॥ भ्रमरः भवरो भमरो भमलो ॥ इस्मो ॥ प्रथमशब्दस्य चत्वारि रूपाणि । पुढुमो पढुमो पढमो पुढमो ॥ स्त्री थी॥ SUTRA III, 11. 1 11. ॥ बतौयचतुर्थयोः प्रथमद्वितीयौ ॥ ११ ॥ वर्गाणं इतौयचतुर्थयोः स्याने यथासंख्यं प्रथमद्धितीयौ भक्तः ॥ नगर । मार्गणः मक्षणो । गिरितट किरितट । मेघः मेखो। व्याघ्रः पुरखो। धर्मः खयो । राजा राचा । जर्जरं पचरं। जौमूतः चौमूदो) निरः णिकरो । प्रहरः छच्छरो। तडागं तडाक(८) । मंडल मंटन महकः टमरको । गाढं काठे। पंडः मंठो(८) । ढका) ठसा । मदन मतनो(११)। कंदर्पः कंतप्यो । दामोदरः तमोतरो। मधुरं मधुरं । धवः पंचयो॥ ... ( DC, D• ()C •ढो, Don () - ढो, Dो Digjen (o) 80 OD, with #. () So CD, with ; be insccorrec (OD () । (१.D. नRUS.CD bäi o han qal'correotion in pencil #TOTA YAT ·APPENDIX C D. ४८ । TO SUTRA III, 12. ON PAGE 26. ..पति | जिनप्रतिमा जिणपडिमा। वितस्ति:(१) विहत्यौ()। वमतिः वसही। भरतः भरहो । कातरः काइलो । मातुलिंग:(२) माडलिंगो । पापं पावं। पुत्रः विट्ठो। पुची विट्ठी) । SUTRA III, 15*. ON PAGE 27. || 15 पवयोर् मा वा ॥ १५ ।। पकारवकारयोः स्थाने मकारो वा भवति ॥ शवरः(५) मवरो समरो। खप्नः(५) सिविणे सिमिणे । नौवी(५) पौवी गोमी। पूर्व:(६) पुखो) पुरिमा ॥ TO SUTRA III, 16. ON PAGE 27. दो ॥ वर्द्धमानः वड्डमाणे । वृद्धः वुड्डो । धर्म ॥ खिद्यते खिजए । रुदितं रुखं ॥ SUTRA III, 17. ON PAGE 27. ।। 17 | जन्य रः ॥ १७ ॥ जकारस्य स्थाने रकारो भवति ॥ व्युत्सृजामि वासरामि। व्युत्सृजति वोसरह ॥ यष्टिः लट्ठी(८) । यष्टिका लडिया(द) । TO SUTRA III, 19. ON PAGE 28. नानं ॥ राजा राणा। प्राज्ञा प्राणा॥ TO SUTRA III, 20. ON PAGE 28. कणः ॥ (१०)करीरः कोरो। करोति कुणदू ॥ वज्झो॥ भगिणी। वहिनी भदौ ॥ . (३) D वितस्तौ ॥ (१) D विहछौ। (१) D लिंगा। (४) D विडी ॥ (१) D om. (() D पूर्मः । (0) D पुशे॥ (८) C सगै, D लड्डौ ॥ (९) C •ठिया, D विषा॥ (१०) om. this example. 7 ·५० APPENDIX CD. TO SUTRA III, 21. ON PAGE 28. जिन्ना ॥ वडमुख(१) वलमुई। गरु:(९) गरलो। तडागः तलाो(२) । कौडति कौल(७) । स्फटिकः फलिहो। SUTRAS III, 22, 22. ON PAGE 28. ।। 22 ॥ पवयोर व्यसायः ॥ २२ ॥ पवयोर व्यत्मासो भवति ॥ पापं पावं ॥ ।। 22 ॥ रलयोर व्यत्मामः ॥ २२० । पथ्यकः । etc. TO SUTRA III, 23. ON PAGE 29. जन्हा ॥ कस्मात् कन्हा। तस्मात् तन्हा(५) । तस्मिन् तन्हि(६) ।। TO SUTRA III, 30. ON PAGE 31. ॥ वरिमं ॥ श्री मिरी। हौः(१) हिरौ। अर्हत् अरहता। प्राचार्य: आय- रित्रो(८)। स्त्री इत्यो(र) पदुमं ॥ तन्वी तणुवी। लध्वी लहवी। गुझे गुरुवौ । पृथ्वी पुहवी। (१)बही (१०)बहुवी। दो मदुवौ । स्यात् सिया(११)। स्थाबादः मित्रावात्रो(१९) । भव्यः भवित्रो(१६) । (१४)श्वः कृतं सुवे कर्य। जनाः सुवे जणा। ज्या जोत्रा है ॥ TO SUTRA III, 31. ON PAGE 31. तेरह ॥ चयमित(१५) तेतीमा। चयोविंशतिः(१५) तेवौसा ।। (१) D०॥ (२) D गु० ॥ (३) D तसा ॥ (४) D कौसरं ॥ (1) D त॥ (4) D नधि॥ (७) Dी॥ (5) D रि॥ (8) Dसै॥ (१०) D३०॥ (११) सिषा। (१२) Dor (१९) D भविष.॥ (१४) D खः॥ (१५) Com.

·APPENDIX CD. SUTRA III, 31. ON PAGE 32. ॥ 11 34 ॥ कगचजतदपयवा प्रायो लुक् ॥ ३४ ॥ खरात् परेषां अनादिभूतानां असंयुकानां कगरजतदपयवां प्रायो लुग भवति ॥ क(२) । काकः कात्रो(९) ॥ग । नागः पात्रो(४) ॥। पिशाच पिसानो) ॥ज। गजः गो॥ त। शितं मित्र॥ द । मदः मत्रो॥प। मूपुरं णेउरं॥ य । निश्चयः णिच्छ (र) ॥ व। देवः दे॥ अनादर इति किं ॥ कालो। गंधो। चोरो । परउद्यो(८) ॥ कचिद् श्रादेर् अपि ॥ पुन: उणेर)। गंधं अंधं। च । वृषभः उमहो ॥ असंयुक्तस्येति किं । अर्कः(१०) अक्को । चक्र १०) चक्कं । क्वचित- संयुक्तस्यापि ॥ मतांवरः एचरो । नमस्कारः णमायारो एवयारो(११) ॥ प्रायो ग्रहणात् कचिम् न भवति ॥ शपथः(१९) सवहो। शापः(११) सावो। सकुसुम(१४) । प्रयागजल(१०) पयाग- जलं । प्रयुकं पजुत्तं (१५) । विप्रयोगः विप्पजोत्रो ॥ SUTRA III, 35. ON PAGE 32. ॥ :) || यवं अवार्मः ॥ ३५ ॥ कगचजतदपयवां प्रायो लुकि सति शेषोऽवोऽवर्मपरो यवं श्रापद्यते ॥ TO SUTRA III, 36. ON PAGE 32. लच्छौ ॥ इति श्रीचंडवतप्राकृतलक्षणे(१५) व्यंजनविधामं हतीयं समाप्तं ॥ TO SUTRA III, 39. ON PAGE 33. परतं ॥ पुरुषः पुलिथे । (१० एषः ए। । (१०/मेष:(१८) मे ॥ (३) D का, (१) See H. C. I, 177. (२) D adds numbers, thus क १, ग २, etc. and adds the following examples कोकिस्ता कोरला । काको काई। प्रतिकूसः परि- कला। (४) D॥ (1) D पिसाउ॥ (() D हिचिचो॥ (0) D देवो ॥ (5) C •ठो, D • डो; D adds the Skr. परपुष्टः ॥ (E) Dोयो । (१०) C om. (११) D adds मवकारः। (१२) C D स.॥ (१३) श्रापः (modern Hindi साप्). (१४) मकरम । (१५) C पन्नतं ॥ (१९) D reads • प्राइसप्रकारे ॥ (१०) C om. this example. (१८) D मिष॥

·* APPENDIX C D. गाथा(१)। (२)लइशवशनमिलाइलशिलवित्रलिदमंदाललाजिदहिजुगे(९) । वौलजिणे पक्खालदु मम (७)शयलम् अवज्जजवालं* ॥ १ ॥ SUTRA III, 39. ON PAGE 33. ।। 30• || (५)शौरसेन्या तकारस्य दकारो वा भवति ॥ (दाव ताव । कर्द ॥ कयं । (७)गर्द गयं। सुदं सुनं। इत्यादि ॥ ॥ोक (८) संस्कृत प्राकृतं चैवाप्रभंशोऽथ पिशाचिकौ। मागधौ ()शौरसेनी च षड्भाषाश् च प्रकीर्तिताः ॥९॥ * Ed. रभस-बाश-मय-सुर-शिर-विगलित-मंदार-राजितांछि-युगः । वीरजिनः प्रक्षालयतु मम सकलम् अवद्य-जंबालं ॥१॥ .. (१) Com.. () D इलश, C originally इलश, but corrected into लहर ; also C D नमिच, but in H. C. IV, 288 ममिल ; also D विश्वविद ॥ (९) D भुगे॥ (७) C D सयलम् ॥ (M) C D give no sutra for this commentary ; but add it as if it were part of sútra 39. (() D prefixes तापः (sic); see H. C. IV, 262. (७) C D read पदं पयं ॥ (८) C om. (e) C D सौ ॥

·APPENDIX B C D ५३ APPENDIX BCD. TO SUTRA I, 3. ON PAGE 3. शम् ॥ गंगा । (१)तुम्हे रक्खउ(२) । रक्ख(२) वो वः । (२)अन्हे रक्खउ(२) । रक्वउ(२) नो(४) नः ॥ उसि ॥ (५)तस्मा तिस्मा() ॥ उन्म ॥ (पुत्तो ते । पुत्तो मे । तव सुई । मम सुह(८) ॥ कि ॥ गामे)। कुले(९) । तब(१०) तत्थ(१९) । तस्मि(१९) तन्दि । त्वयि तथि। मयि(१९) ॥ TO SUTRA II, 4. ON PAGE 15. दंगाला ॥ (१४)विंशतिः वौसा । त्रिंशत्(१५) तौसा । वक्ष्ये १५) *वुच्छ (१९) । (१४)वभि वेम्मि(१०)॥ नेपुरं ॥ (१५)संग्टहाति संगिएहदू(१८)। कृत्वा कटु(१९) (१९) । नियनविहन २०) : मुहं । निवार्यते २९) नौवारिश्रदू(२२) ॥ * B ग्रुवे ॥ + C नयनविहौमं मुखं । (8) C D (९) C D तुम्भे॥ (२) B रक्खयो । (३) D पो॥ (५) B तसा॥ (१) B नाह; D adds यस्याः जस्मा जिस्मा । कस्याः कस्ता किस्मा; and C D add गिरियो (see I, 12). (७) C D ते पुनो। मे पुता ॥ (८) C D add Skr. सव सुखं । मम सुर्थ ॥ (e) C D add गामम्मि and कुलम्मि ॥ (१०) Com. (११) D तच्छ॥ (१९) BOD नमिम् ; the whole reading in B is confused सत्य । तस्मिन् । नया तम्भि (or मम्मि)। सन्धि। संन्दि (or तन्दि ?) । (१३) B बयि मयि तर मर, D बयि तर मयि मर, C only तर मर॥ (१४) B om. this example (see iii, 32. ii, 15). (१५) Bom. Skr. translation, but see the marginal gloss. (१६) D०॥ (१७) D repeats वेमि ॥ (१८) संमिहर ॥ (१८) B का, D का (see ii, 19). (२०) B मरम वजमुई ॥ (२९) So B; C D निवार्यने । (२२) B निम्बा०, C D रोवाः ॥

·४ APPENDIX BCD. TO SUTRA III, 3. ON PAGE 24. भक्खरो ॥ कः करोति को कर । कः पचति को पय(१) ॥ TO SUTRA III, 6. ON PAGE 24. लछी ॥ C D ॥ श्रात्मा अप्पा। तीन तिह(२) ॥ TO SUTRA III, 23. ON PAGE 29. जन्हा ॥ (३)कृष्णः कण्हो(४) । ग्रीन:(५) गिन्हो(१) । अमा(०) उन्हा(क)। TO SUTRA III, 24. ON PAGE 29. दुग्गा ॥ शक्रः मक्को) । तस्करः तक्करो॥ TO SUTRA III, 27. ON PAGE 30. अन्येषाम् उनविशेषाणं वि० स एव भ०॥१० अ०। स्वर्गं सग्गं । स० स०॥ दुर्जनः दुजणो। नायः(९) नट्टो १०) । भुक्तं भुत्तं । धान्यं धन्न(११)। सर्पः सप्यो । एल्व(१२) सुखं । काव्यं कव्वं । शस्यं सम्म(१२). TO SUTRA III, 35. ON PAGE 32. माया। पिशाचाः पिमाया। (१)वनराजा वणराया। माता माया(१५)। यदा जया(१६) । (१४)पापफल पायहलं ॥ अवर्म इति किं ॥ देवाः देवा(१७)। पिता(१८) पित्रा(१८) । (२०)लोकस्य लोश्रम । भुवनं भुत्रणं । क्वचिद् भवत्य् एव ॥ पिवति(२१) पिया ॥ -- (१) B पचद् or पचर?॥ (२) B तौहं॥ () A also has this example, see note १२, p. 29; A C D place it before स्वम्णा (see p. 29), but B after जन्हा ॥ (४) A कन्हो (see note १२. p. 29). (५) C D पोयो । (१) C D place this example before यस्मात् (see p. 29). (७) B D उमा॥ (८) D भो॥ (e) C D माय॥ (१०) C D पाई। (११) So B; C D धमं ॥ (१९) Conjectural ; B has शकर हुक; C D N ॥ (१३) B महं॥ (१४) B om. this example. (१५) Badda मारदा सारया ॥ (१९) B adds पवन पवक्रय (MS. अपक्षत) पपडित परियं (MS. परित); then follows पिता, then माता, then भारदा॥ (१७) B देयाः ॥ (१८) B places this among the regular examples, see footnote f. (8) D foret al (२०) Bom. the remainder. (१) C om. .

·INDEX OF SU'TRAS. ५५ I. INDEX OF SU'TRAS. CHAPTER I. A Text Appendix I,1 Manuscripts. BI CD 11 - सिद्धं प्राकृतं चेधा ॥ - 2 लिंग च ॥ 2 2 212 3 3 33 3 4 तस्मात् संस्कृतवद् विभक्रयः ॥ कचिद् व्यत्ययः ॥ मागमस्य अप्य श्रामो पो हो वा ॥ 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 मंख्याया एहः॥ 6 6 6 GO 7 788 8 8 99 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 1212 11 11 13 13 CD6टाणः ॥ 7 हि भिमः ॥ 8 हिंतो भ्यमः ॥ 9 हतीयादीनां एवं एकत्वे स्त्रियां ॥ 10 पाउलोपा जश्शमाः ॥ CD 10- दित्रिशब्दाभ्यां जशासोर णि: ॥ 11 पुंसि पूर्वत्वं ॥ c 11. क्लीवे जशोर ॥ 12 को उसेश् च ॥ 13 स्मश्च डन्सः ॥ 14 एम्मि खः ॥ 15 ए शो ऽतः ॥ 16 तोतु हितोलोपाम् तस्य प्रातः॥ 17 तद् इदमोः से षष्ठीरूपाणं ॥ 14 -- 12 12 15 14 13|13|18| 15 141417 | 16 15 doest 18117 16/16/19/18 17 17 20/19 ·५६ INDEX OF SU'TRAS. भकः॥ |Text|Appendix CHAPTER I. A B C D 18 युभदः ॥ 18 18|21| 20 19 C D [तं तुं तु तुहं C D] तुमं मौ मवि- 19 19 2221 20 CD अमि तुए [तुमं तं C D] च ॥ 20/20/24/23 21 तुम्भे जसि ॥ 2121 123|22 122 तुझे शमि ॥ 22/22/25/24 23 ते तुमे तद तए टायां ॥ 23/23/26/25 124 तुमाहिं तुमाहितो तुमातो तदत्तो 2424/28/27 पंचम्यां ॥ 2525/29/28 25 3029 तुहतुज्झतुम्ह षठ्यां ॥ C D 25* तुम्हम् श्रामि ॥ CD 250 तद डी 3130 261263332 3433 3534 36135 3736 27 273837 26 |C D26हउं हं हं मौ मविभतः ॥ CD 26 अम्हे जसि ॥ CD26 मम् अमि ॥ CD26 अन्हे शमि.॥ 27 मे मए टायां ॥ 28 मदत्तो उमौ ॥ 29 अन्दाहिंतो भ्यसि ॥ 30 महमा डमि 31 अहम् श्रामि ॥ CD 31 मरी 28283938 29294039 30304140 3131142141 4342 ·INDEX OF SU'TRAS. A B CID 1 1 1 1 2 - 3 -- 4 Text|Appendix CHAPTER II. D 1. संस्कृतवत् संधिकार्य पदयोः ॥ 1 खराणां खरे प्रकृति लोपगंधयः॥ D खरस्य उद्धृते ॥ D 1 न युवर्णस्य अखे ॥ 2 संयोगपरे लोपः॥ 3 हुखत्वं संयोगे॥ 4 खरोऽन्योऽन्यस्य ॥ 5 स्वरा रिच सुवर्णस्य॥ 6 एरंतः॥ 21 2 2 5 3। 3 6 4 4 4 7 5 on 6 6 619 77710 7 8 श्रोरौतः॥ 8 8 811 17 - 9 9 9 912 10 एद् श्रोद्रलोपा विमर्जनौयस्य ॥ 1010 10 13 11 अदागमाऽनुस्खर लोपौ च व्यंजनस्य ॥ 11 1111 14 12 दिवं बहुवेन ॥ 12 12 1215 13 षष्ठीवच् चतुर्थी॥ 13/13/1316 CD 13 प्रथमाया द्वितीया पार्षे ॥ 11 CD 130 सप्तम्यास् हतीया आर्षे ॥ 14 CD न मुतङनन CD]ञाः॥ 14/14/16/19 15 अनुखारो बहुलं ॥ 1515/17/20 16 गोर गावि॥ .18/16/18/21 एवार्थ परचेवा चियाः ॥ 17171922 18 प्रय अयोर खोपः॥ 18182023 15/18 17 ·५८ INDEX OF SU'TRAS. Text/Appendix] CHAPTER II. A | BCID 19 CD नुत्ता चाटुकुंदण[वाण C D] श्रो विCD] [प्पि A B] [प्पिणु वेप्पिणु C D] पूर्वकालार्थे ॥ 19/19 21341 120 मत्व अर्थ बाल दलौ ॥ 20/20/22 25/ CD तत्रभवेऽपि इस उल्ला॥ C D अधो हेटः॥ 21 OD ताताव जाजावास् C D] तावद् [यावता: C D]॥ 2121/23/26/ 22 उपमाने पिव व विवविय व्ववजहा 22/22 | 2427 वतः॥ 23 श्रोत्वं श्रवपयोः॥ 12323 25281 24 खलोः खुः॥ 24241 2629 25 25 25 27301 26 26 26 I,321,31 27 27 1,441,43 127 28311 -- 293X तो वर्तमानार्थे । भे सर्वासु युमदः॥ अस्मदोऽपि भे सर्वासु CD] C D27" दूजेराः पादपूरणे ॥ 27 जि अव्ययं एवार्थे । 27. वरि अानंताथै ॥ 3; 27 वरु केवलार्थे । 27 यदः कुडु ॥ 27 थूथू छिछि कुत्मायां ॥ 276 दडबड शोधार्थ 27 अतिरभसाद् ऊर्धमुखस्य इतस्ततो गमने 30/33/ 31 34 3235/ 33361 " 34 371 35/38/ ·INDEX OF SUTRAS. ५८ " - Text Appendix CHAPTER II. A B C D. CD 27 णं ण णाई णावद् जणि मणु दूवार्थे । 27273639 27 दाणिं एरिहं एत्ताहे एवहिं ददानौमः॥ 3740 27 यथा तथा अनयोः स्थाने जिम तिमौ॥ -- 3811 28 इतेर् ईयः ॥ 28/283942 |29 भावे त्तणः ॥ 29204013 CD 29 नो उः ॥ 4144 " CHAPTER III. -- 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 हाद् यवी लोप्यौ॥ पावलेभ्यो व्यंजनं ॥ वर्गे॥ शे वर्गाद्यं ॥ वर्गाद् अवयं ॥ शाच च पंचमो वा ॥ 4 4 4 44 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 दो वे वा॥ 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 1010 8 पाट्टः॥ 9 रेफः पूर्वश् च ॥ 10 असंयोगस्य ॥ 11 प्रथमद्वितीययोर द्वितीयचतुर्थी CD 110 बतौयचतुर्थयोः प्रथमद्वितीयौ ।। 12 प्रथमस्य तौयः॥ हो [A Bख] घधभानां ॥ 1111 10 10 11 11 12 121212 13 13131313 14 सस्य खवाः॥ 14141414 ·INDEX OF SUTRAS.. Text Appendix|| - CHAPTER III. A B CID. 15 यस जः॥ 15/15/1515 C D 15- पवयोर् मा वा॥ 16/16 | 16 तवर्गस्य चटवा॥ 16116 1717 17 युभदो यस्य तः॥ 17 17 1,271,26/ CD17- जस्य र॥ 1818 18 रशषाणां मः॥ 18 18 19/19 19 हजथानां रनखाः ॥ 19192020 20 गरहाणणं घणझाः॥ 20202121 21 मडहानां वलभाः ॥ 21/21/22/22 22 CD यवयोर व्यत्मासः ॥ (C D पव व्य०) 22/22/23/23 CD 22° रलयोर् व्यत्मासः ॥ 24/24 23 भइयोर लोपे नणमानाम् अधो होऽप- दादौ स्थितानां ॥ 23/23/2525 24 लोपे दित्वं ॥ 24/24/26/26 25 क्वचिद् अलोपेऽपि॥ 2525/27/27 26 तस्मिन् द्वितीयचतुर्थयोः प्रथम- - तीयौ ॥ 26/26/28/28 27 स एव अन्येषां ॥ 27/27/29/29 128 28/28/3030 29 29/293131 30 न पदादौ॥ कचिद् अन्यत्र अपि ॥ संयोगस्य दरखरागमो मध्ये॥ यवयोर् इद् तौ॥ संख्यायाम तिशयोर् लोपः॥ 30/30/32/32 81 313133133 32 32132184124 ·INDEX OF SU TRAS. १६ |Text Appendis CHAPTER III. AB c D 133 तस्य च॥ 3333135 35 134CD कहतौययोः खरे॥ (CD कगरजत- दपयवां प्रायो लुक्) 343436 36 35 C D यत्वम् श्रवणे ॥ (CD य. अवर्ण:) 35 36 37 37 36 शिष्टप्रयोगाद् व्यवस्था ॥ 3636| 38 38 37 न लोपोऽपभ्रंशेऽधो रेफस्य ॥ 3737 IV, I IV,1 38 पैशाचिक्यां रणयोर् लनौ॥ 3838 IV,2 IV,2 39 मागधिकायां रसयोर् लशौ॥ 3939 IV,3 IV,30 40 CD 39 शौरसेन्यां तस्य दो वा ॥ ) 39 IV, 4 IV, 4 , ·१२ INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. II. INDEX OF PRA KRIT WORDS OCCURRING IN THE FOREGOING PAGES. -- Numbers preceded by capital letters refer to the Appendices; the others to the Text ; words enclosed within angular brackets, [ ], refer to the Footnotes. " [i, 5. i, 5. अहाहं C D, i, 5. अहम्मि C D,i, 314. पन्हेसु i, 3. C D,i,318. प(च) C D, iii, 34. अम्हारिसो C D, ii, 5. बरसरियं ii, 7. वरहंतो ii,11. C D, iii, 30. धरहंताएं CD, बको iii, 3. 9. 27. 36. C D, iii, 34. [अरिहंताणं C D,i, 5.]] अग्गि (nom. sg.) i, 3. अग्गिं 1, 3. अग्गिणे चिरहंता CD,i, 5.]] (gen. sg.) i, 13. अग्गिरम i, 13. [चम्गिए चलिउल,i,111. i, 14.] चम्गिम्मि i, 14. अग्गो (nom. pl.) चले iii, 38. i, 11. पग्गियो (nom. pl.) i, 12. चम्गि- चला C D, iii, 6. हिंi, 3. [चमौरितोi, 8.] चम्गिसुत, 3. अवजढो B, iii, 34. पम्चो iii, 9. 26. [चवक्वयं B C D, iii, 35.] अषर्ण iii, 9. चवज० C D, iii, 39. पच्छति ii, 1. पवयास D, ii, 10. बचरा iii, 4. [चवडियं B C D, iii, 35.] पज्ज CD, i, 1. असल Ci, 11. पनि D, ii, 14. घi, 3. 24. C D,i, 26. ii, 26. पक्षारिसो C D, ii, 5. हि. C D, iii, 39. बता C D, iii, 6. [चत्यो iii, 9.] या। [चनेजर ii, 10.] [चारणाहो iii, 11.] गंध C D, iii, 34. [चाररिचाणं C D, i, 5.] अपुको CD, ii, 20. पाइरियाणं C D, i, 5. पप्पा iii, 3. B C D, iii, 6. पप्पु C D, ii,27. चाणा C D, iii, 19. संवं iii, 9. चादा C D, iii, 6. बम C D, ii, 24. चामिसं iii, 18. चन्द (nom. pl.) i, 3. C D,1, 3. 24. 26°. पायरियो C D, iii. 30. को acc. pl.) BODi,B.C D,i,264.पाया C D, ifi,6. बम्हेरि i, 8. C D, i, 7. पहेरिसोi, 8. •चान ii, 20. C D, ii, 20. पन्हाहितो , 29. Ti, 31. बना C D, बास्न C D, ii, 20. . .

·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. (३ एल CD, ii, 27 एत्य Ci, 11. रति i, 12. एलिमो CD,ii, 5. एवं ii, 19.2.1.28. एवCिD, ii, 27k. एशे CD, iii, 39. एस ii. 22. B C D, ii, 10. [एसोi, 4. रतं ii, 10.] यो। TOD, ii, 27. 'गाला ii, 4. इच्छितं ii, 3. iii, 4. T&T C D, ii, 5. त C D, ii, 20. इत्थी C D, iii, 30. इमा ii, 1. रय ii, 28. र C D, ii, 20. 18° C D. i, 1. इम ii, 20. C D, ii, 20. इव ii, 1. 22. इसि ii, 5. ii, 1. 18. रइच्छति ii, 1. इहागतो ii, 1. ई। 1. ECD, ii, 11. . मिरो ii, उका iii, 3. उकिट्ठ iii, 8. C D, iii, 3. उकोस ii, 5. iii, 8.29. उट्ठो iii, 9. एमु ii, 3. iii, 9. BC, iii, 5. OTTI C D, ii, 31. उप्पलं iii, 3. जन्हा IB C D, iii, 23. • उल C D, ii, 20. [उवउभाचाणं C D, i, 5.] उवमायाणं C D, i, 5. वरिलो C D, ii, 20. उसहो C D, ii, 5. iii, 34. [ो CD, ii, 14.] यो ii, 19. चोवरयो ii, 23. योमरितं, 23. योमहं, 8. मोहमिथ ii, 23.] योहसितं ii,23. क। (क) को B C D, iii, 3. किंत, 23. [केण ii, 6.] कन्हा C D, iii, 23. काणं ii, 15. का ii, 15. कद्गा (कवि) B, iii,34. कईयां (कपि) B, iii,1, करवा ii, 9. कउल्ला, ii, 9. कज्ज ii, 3. कणवारा iii, 20. कणौरो CD, iii, 20. कपहा IB C D, iii, 23. कपर iii, B. कत्य ii, 4. कंतप्या C D, iii, 11. कदम iii, 9. कंदलं i, 1. कतुजाधोii, 2. [कहा iii,23.] कमल [i, 1.] ii, 22. कमसर C, ii, 110. कम्मं , 11. कम्माशंi, 5. कममाVi5. कतरे ii, 10. करर B C D, iii, 3. [कर C D, ii, 276.] कुसर C D, iii, 20. कर्म , 23. 27. ii, जढा ii 1. र। एचारिसो C D, ii, 5. रगं iii, 12. efie C D, ii, 27k ·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. 18. 28. कदं iii, 12:0D, iii, 39. कर्य C, ii, 27.CD, ii, 26. iii, 30. iii, 399. खगं iii, 8. कय० C D, i, 269. कासवं ii, 4. iii, 9. खंभो iii, 10. 19. 29. कपि ii, 19. कहु , 19. B C D, ii, | खमा iii, 4. 4. कातूण ii, 5. काउचाण [ii, 19.] OD, | खम्मो C D. iii, 114. करि० C, i, 110. [ii, 19. खिन्नर C D, ii, 16. कल. iii, 39. कलायो i, 25. खिमा iii, 30. कव्वं ii, 3. iii, 2. B C D, iii, 27. खii, 24. C D, ii, 24. कवरो C D, ii, 20. खदो iii, 28. [कसि iii, 30.] ग। कथिष्ण ii, 25. गवणं D, ii, 12. काई B, iii, 34. [O D, iii, 34.] गति ii, 17. कायो B, iii, 34. C D, il, 34. कारण B, गो D, iii, 34.B,iii,34. गरण B, iii, 34. काठ CD, iii, 110. [iii, 34. गंगा i, 2. (nom. sg.) गंगां i, 3. गंगार i, 9. काया iii, 35. गंगा (acc. pl.) B C D,i, 3. कालो C D, iii, 34. काल C D, ii, 271. गच्छति ii, 4. 10. [गमिही C D ii, 276.] कालेणं C D, ii, 13. गदं C D, iii, 39. गयं C D, iii, 394. कावुरिसं B, iii, 34. काउरिसं B, iii, 34. गंडाई, i, 11. कासवो iii, 29. गणंति C, i, 11a. कालो C D, iii, 12. गंधउडी D, ii, 12. किरितटं CD, iii, 114. गंध C D, iii, 34. कौलर C D, iii, 21. गंभौरा ii, 21. कौवो iii, 5. गयणं ii, 21. गयणातोi, 16. गयणातु i, 16. कुण C D, iii, 20. गयणहितोi, 16. गयणा (abl. sg.)i, 16. [कुडो iii, 28.] [गयणारित, 16.] कुल 1, 2. [कलो 1,4.] कुल्ले B C D, i, 3. गरलो C D, iii, 21. [कुस्तम्मि B C D, i, 3.] कुलानि i, 3. | गलेर D, ii, 271. कुलेखi, 3. गय्विरो C D, ii, 20. काथा B, iii, 34. गहवर C D,i, 1. [कूची iii, 34.] B, iii, 34. कूयो B, ifi, | गहेसो ii, 1. 34. कूरण B, iii, 34. गामतर्ण ii, 29. ATAT C D, ii, 20. गामा (nom. sg.) ii, 1. गामो ii, 1. गामे, करिसो C D, ii, 5. 14. C D,i, 1. B C D, i, 3. माममि i कैच D, ii, 14. 14. B C D,i, 3. गामेरित, 7. गामारितो कोरतो iii, 34. [कोरला OD, iii, 34.] CD, i, 3. गामेहिताi, 8. कोमसंi, 1. गागौ (गाई) ii, 16. गावौयो [गावौज गावी] कोरी iii, 28. ii, 16. गायौं गावौर गावौहिंगाबौहितो करवा D, ii, 14. गावी ii, 16. गावोसुं , 16. [गावौड i, कोला D, i, 14 16. ' . कूड D,i, 1. कूल CD,i, 1.

·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. (५ . गिहति iii, 23. चोर CD, i, 1. गिम्हो ii, 22. B C D, iii, 23. चोरो CD, iii, 34. गिरिणोi, 12. [गिरीएं , 3.] ii, 19. गुणा i, 17. 25. 30. C D, i, 250. पिय i, 17.21. [गुरू 1,3.] गुतं i, 3, गुरुल i, 3. C D, i, [Vii, 22.] 64. गुरुण (gen. sg.) ii, 13. [गहरi, 14.] गुरुम्मिi, 14. गुरू (nom. pl.) i, 11. गरमा पर्ण iii, 3. (nom. pl.) ii, 21. गुरूहिं C D, i, 7.| पच्छरो C D, iii, 11". [गुरूहिंतोi, 8.] C D, i, 3. गरुणं C D, छटो iii, 26. i, 5. गुरूहं C D, i, 5. गुरुवौ (nom. sg.) छायचो iii, 3. CD, iii, 30. इम्पहो ii, 3. 14. c , ii, 24. गुरु गोमई B, iii, 34. शिक्षिCD, 276. पामो iii, 37. दुड CD, ii, 27°. एहिमा 10 C D, ii, 21. घ। घi, 5. घर iii, 10. 19. 20. CD, i, 11. जम्हा iii, 23. जमा BCD, घसि iii, 37. i, 3. जिस्मा B C D,i, 3.] जाई C,i, 110. (अमित, 3.] चवीस CD, ii. 134. जजपा B, iii, 3. चउसट्ठी [C D, ii, 14.] जडा iii, 12. चकं C D, iii, 3.1. जडालो i, 20. चचर CD, iii, 114. टिमा ii, 20. चमारो C D, i, 3. चनारि C D, i, 3. [(जणा CID, iii, 30. D, ii, 14.] चउरो C D, i, 3. चए C जम (dleclined) [C D, i 1.] D, i, 6. जत iii, 6. चंद. iii, 39. [• चंदे (nom. pl.) ii, 19.] अंन.i,21. चंदणं ii, 22. जता iii, 15. चंदुज्जला ii, 1. अद्रोi, 1. 'नन्द्रिकोज्जनौय ,1, जया B CD, iii, 35. चमर ii, 22. अन C ID, ii, 24. •ज CD, iii, 34. चरियार C D, ii, 27h. जलंतिi, 12. चाई B, iii,31. जनहिप ii, 21. चायो B, iii,34. चारण B, iii,34. जंवालं CD, iii, 39. feat C D, i, 1. जो , 4.] ii, 22. चिट्ठति C D, i, 3. जह CD, i, 1. चिय, 31. ii, 17. [21. C D, i, 254. महा 1, 22. चौमूदो C D, iii, 11. ना (यावत्) [ii, 21.] C D, ii, 21. [चको ii, 15.] मादि iii, 37. मारिसो CD, ii, 5. जालं i, 1. 9 धुंनो ii, 15. चय ii, 17.

·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. जुव्वर्ण iii, 15. जाय ii, 21. C D,i, LCD, i, 21: हाई C Di, 5. ECD, i, 5. पहिलो for C D, ii, 276. CD, i, 3. i CD, 1,7. [जिशिंद. ii, 19.] शकरं C D, iii, 110. जिण. C D, ii, 134. iii, 12. निशे (nom. गट्ठो C D, iii, 3. sg.) ii, [10.] OD, iii, 39. VÄT C D, i, 5. जिनस्स ii, 18. णमायारो C D, iii, 34. जिम्मा iii, 1. 21. 26. एयण C D, ii, 12. जिम C D, ii, 271. परो C D,i, 26. जिन्न iii, 23. पावयारो C D, iii, 34. जीचा C D, iii, 30. एवरि C D, ii, 270. जुगे C D, iii, 39. पवर C D, ii, 274. वि C,i, 11. CD, ii, 278 पायो C D, iii, 34. जो C D, ii, 271 णिकडो C, ii, 27. C D, ii, 26. जोया C D, ii, 271. fax (declined) [CD, i, 1.) जोगवहा C D, ii, 14.]] णिच्छयो C D, iii, 34. जोयण C D,i, 1. पिच्छरो CD, iii, 110. [पिद र C D, ii, 278.] भ। णियमें C D, ii, 27. भसरि.CD,i, 1. शिहिदं Ci, 27. C D, ii, 26. ट। पोमो C D, iii, 15. उमरको C D, iii 112 शौवी CD, iii, 154 खरं C D, iii, 34. •विलासा iii, 38. शेहालू C D, ii, 20. त। ठितो iii, 16. तं [i, 19.] ii, 18. C, ii, 27. C D, i, 19. ठका C D, iii, 11a. वंi, 3. तुमं (nom. sg.) i, 19.28. 29. C D,i, 19. तुं [i, 19.] C D,i, 19. तुवं डंडो iii, 16. [i, 19.] CD, i, 19. तुई [i, 19.] CD जवडव C D, ii, 270. i, 19. तुऊँ [CD, ii, 278.] खां i, 3. नांi, [डाढा iii, 9.] 3. सं (ace. sg.) [i, 20.] CD, i, 20. तुम (acc. sg.) i, 20. C D,i, 20. तुर (acc. [डोला CD, ii, 278.]] sg.)i, 20.CD,i, 20. मे (instr. sg.) i, 23. तुमे i, 23. सरi, 28. सरi, 23. सुमारि (abl. sg.) i, 24 तुमारितोi, [ii, B. 21.] C,i, 11. D, ii, 10. C D, 24. तुमातोi, 24. सरतो i, 24. से (gen. i, 1. sg.) B C D,i,3. सव B C D, i, 8. तुर • CD,i, 6. i, 25. ii, 22. तुझा i, 25. ii, 22. तुम, पाचरो CD, iii, 34. 25. खयि B C D, i, 3. नयि B C D,i, पर ii, 17. 8. तर CD,i, 25. तुम्हCि D.i. 250. i, 19. या।

·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. . 'तुन्हे (nom. pl.) i, 3. [21] CD, i, 3. | [•तुचाय ii, 19.] तुम्मे (nom. pl.) i,21. तुम्रे (ace. pl.) B| तुंगो C D, i, 1. C D, i, 8. तुम्भे (ace. pl.) i,22. ii, 27. तुम्हारिमो CD, ii, 6. तुम्हेहि i, 3. C D, i, 7. तुम्नेहि iii, 17.[तुस्लिज्जति ii, 21.] तुम्हेरितोi, 8. C D, i, 24. तुम्हापां 1,5. • तुम ii, [5.] 19. तुम्हारं i, 5. तुम्ह C D, i, 254. तुम्हेसi, [मेनौस CD, ii, 11.] तीसा C D, iii, 31. 3. C D, i, 250. [तुम्हेसु i, 3.] सेर iii, 22. 31. तं ii, 17. C D, ii, 11. 24 नेण C D,i, मंi, 6. [iii. 25.] 26. तेणं C D, ii, 13. तौर i. 9. साए मेयोमा C D, iii, 31. i, 9. सन्हा C D, iii, 23. नस्सा B C D, नग्गुणा० C D, ii, 24. i, 3. तिस्सा B C D, i, 3. तस्मिं B C D, onा ii, 19. i, 3. तन्हि B C D, i, 3. C D, iii, 23. Tii, 19. तब B C D,i, 3. सत्य B C D,i, 3. ते थ। i, 31. C, i, 11. C D, i. 25. ताणं , 5. थंभो iii, 11. ताईi, 5. सं 1, 3. तेसिंi, 3. C D, iii, 9. नई iii, 9. शथ C D, ii, 271 तकरो B C D, iii, 24. द। तडाकं C D, iii, 118. दउझते iii, 1. सशवी C D, iii, 30. दडबड CD, ii,276. सपहा iii, 23. दडो iii, 16. समातरो C D, iii, 118. दभा iii, 9. नलाओ C D, iii, 21. दंसा C D, ii, 271 तपोपरोहा ii, 1. दह i, 14 सह C D, i, 1. दहित, 3. दहिंत, 3. दहिया, 3. C D,i, [तहा C D, ii, 14.] 6". दहिहंत, 3. ता (नावत्) ii, 21. C D, i, 1. ii, 21. दाढा iii, 11. तारिसो C D, ii, 5. दाणि C D, ii, 27k. नाव ii, 21. C D, ii, 21. iii, 398. दारं iii, 7. तिकडं ii, 3. CD, iii, G. दाव C D, iii, 39a. तिथि C D,i, 10. तौहिंCD,i, 7. [नौति दिन. ii, 10. CD,i, '7. तौCिD,i, 7.] नौटिनोदीमले ii, 5. दिहोi, [19.] 23. दिन, C D, i, 3. तिमहं C D,i, 6. तौस CD, 27. [ii, 10.] i, 3. TEC Di, 3. दौलो iii, 29. [दौहा CD, ii, 278.] तिमहं (नौक्षणं) B C D, iii, 6. तित्य. C D, ii, 13. दुजण iii, 9. B C D, iii, 27. तित्यगरो iii, 12. दुई iii, 11. दु. iii,38. दुको CD, iii,3. तिम C D, ii, 271 दुड ii, 15. iii, 3. तियसौसे ii, 1. तिसिवाह C D, ii, 24. देवो B, iii, 34. C D, iii,34. देवोi,2. दौसा CD,ii, 15. BCD,i, 4.गौसाईट6. 8. 19. ii, 10. देखें, 3. देखेर i,8.0 दुगा iii, 24. दूर C,i, 11. , ·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. D, i, Ge. [देव! (abl. sg.) B C D, i, महो B C D, iii, 27. मई iii, 16. 8.] देवस्म i, 13. [देवे (loc. sg:) i, 15. [ममिन C D, iii, 39.] B C D, i, 3. देवम्मि i, 15. B C D,i, •ममिल. C D, iii, 39. 3.] देथा (nom. pl.) B C D, iii, 35. नमो ii, 13. देवा i, 3. [11.] ii, 12. देवाणि i, 4. नयन B C D, ii, 4. [देवाएं or देवाएँ i, 4.] देवे (ace. pl.) | नयरमणं ii, 29. i, 15. देवेहिंi, 7. C D, ii, 15. देवेहि नहं ii, 11. C D, ii, 15. देवेहि C D, ii, 15. देवे- नाणं iii, 6. नानं iii, 19. हितोi, 8.] देवाइंट, 5. देवाणं i, 3. 5. नाणी i, 24. देवेसु i, 3. नाधा iii, 11. देविंद. ii, 1. देविंदो ii, 2. नाया iii, 35. देसो C, ii, 27. C D, ii, 26. निकलं iii, 39. दो C D, i, 109. दुणि C D, i, 109. दुवे निक्खनो i, 24. .C D, i, 10. दोहिं CD, i, 7. [दोहि C निगाहो iii, 9. D, i, 7. दोहि CD, i, 7.] दोहितो निच्च i, 1. iii, 16. D, i, 3. दोपहं C D, i, 6. दोK or दोस | निच्छयो iii, 11. C D, i, 3. निन्हवियं B, iii, 23. दोसा i, 31. निन्हविया B, iii, 23. निसामेथ ii, 26. धा ataftet B C D, ii, 4. षणमण C D, ii, 20. नौसासूसासा ii, 1. धणवतो C D, ii, 20. नेपर ii, 4. नरं [iii,34.] B, iii, 34. धर्म iii, 16. [B C D, iii, 27.] नेहेन ii, 27. धमट्टो ii, 2. नो B C D, i,3. धर्म B C D, iii, 27. प धम्मो iii, 9. धारहिंii, 21. परऊलो B, iii, 34. fayt CD, i, 24. पदकूला iii, 34. धिौरहित, 21.] पर B, iii, 34. धेमु , 8. धेनुं i, 3. धेमूर ii, 4. धेनू (nom. पष्टुं B, iii, 34. pl.) i, 10. धेभूगोi, 10. घे , 10. पणो B, iii, 34. धे]हितो CD, i, 8. धेनुहितोi, 8. धेनूर्ण पर B, iii, 34. i,3. परिसं C D, ii, 9. परेण B, iii, 84. परे C D, i,1, न। पक्बालदु C D, iii, 39. म ii, 21. iii, 25. पच्छं iii, 16. 26. मर, 3. 12. iii, 34. B, iii, 34. नईi, 8. पंचाई , 6. मर , 9. नई (nom. pl.) i, 10. नईयो पजु C D, ii, 34. i, 10. ii, 1. नईउi, 10. नईहिं.i, 3. ii, पज्जुनो iii, 3. 15. मरिमोi, 8. मई 1, 3. नमक, 3. पडिकलो C D, iii, 34.] नज्जत iii, 25. •पडिमा CD, iii, 12. - ·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. . पिसाजी iii, 12. पिसाचो B, iii, 34, CD, iii, 34. पिसाएर B, iii, 34. पिसाया B C D, iii, 35. पौढ़ i, 3. [पौडो (nom. sg.) i, 8.] पौर (acc. sg.) i, 3. [पौठां, 3.] पौलणं , 24. पुढे (स्पयं) i, 1. पर (स्थाएं.) iii, 8. C D, iii, 3. पुढमो C D, iii, 9. पढ़मो CD, iii, 9. पुगर ii, 10. पडिहत्य. C D, i, 1. पडिसिइंiii, 12. पढमो C D, iii, 9. पढ़मो C D, iii, 9. पणपसस iii, 33. पणवेप्पिण C D, ii, 19. ०पणामो C D,i, 264 [पप iii,6.] पन iii, 3. BC, iii, 5. पत्यो iii, 26. पंचवो C D, iii, 114 पदुम iii, 30. पनयि. iii, 38. पनमत iii, 38. पन्ना iii, 32. पन्हा iii, 23. पयर B C D, iii, 3. पयत्यापां C D, ii. 24. पयाग० C D, iii, 31. परउडो C D, iii, 31. पलक्खो iii, 30. पलातं i, 23. [पला, 23. पलवितं i, 24.] पझं को iii, 22. [पना iii, 22.] पदरो iii,9. पवतो iii, 9. पश iii, 39. पसरो C D,i, 1. पसौतु C D, ii, 13. पस्सन, 12. [पसंतिi, 12.] पाउषा B, iii, 34. पाणं C D, ii, 24. पायलं B C D, iii, 35. पाया ii, 12. पावं [iii, 22.] C D, iii, 12. 22. पाहाणे iii, 14. पि ii, 4. 10. 18. 21. पिया B C D, iii, 35. पियर B C D, iii, 35. पिय ii, 22. C D, ii, 27. पुसमतो CID, ii, 20. पुनो B C D, i, 3. पुथवौ , b. पप्पं iii, 26. परिभो C D, iii, 15. परिमो CD, ii, 20. • पुलिंदाण C D, i, 1. पुलिशे C D, iii, 39. पब्बो CD, iii, 154. पस्वी CD, iii, 30. च्छ (D, i, 3.i, 26.1,264. प्पि ii, 19. ["प्पिण ii, 19.] फ। फडालो ii, 20. फडिओ ii, 20. फणणे , 22. फरसं iii, 11. • फलं B, iii, 34. फलिम C D, iii, 21. पुटं iii, 8. 29. फुर C D, iii, 3. . बड़वी CD, iii, 80. बिंद• CD,i, 1. बुडित, 3. ii, 1. 10. बुरित, पौर, 9. ii, 4. बी (nom. pl.) i, 10. बौधोi, 10. ii, 1. पुदौड i, 10. परिvिi,a.

·INDEX OF PRAČKRIT WORDS. बुद्धिहिंसा i, 8. पौणं i, 3. C D, i, 5. बुडौD, i, 5 बुडित i, 3. बुद्धिंदो ii, 1. बुद्धीसो ii, 1. बोसर C D, i, 1. भारो iii, 34. B, iii, 34. भोज C D, ii, 24. भानु ii, 19. भाषण ii, 19. A भा भरणी C D, iii,:20. भक्वरो iii, 3. 11. भंगो ii, 15. भणामि i, 20. 22. ii, 26. C D, ii, 26. ii, 27. भणाम ii, 27. C, ii, 27. भण C, ii, 27. [भणिया C D, ii, 14.1 भतारं C D, i, 1. भरो iii, 28. भमरो C D, iii, 9. भयप्पई C D, ii, 5. भयफ C D, ii, 5. भयमई CD, ii, 5. भरको CD, iii, 12. । भलि C, i, 114. भवरो C D, iii, 9. भवारिसो C D, ii, 5. भवियो C D, iii, 30. भसलो C D, iii, 9. भातु C D, i, 1. भाति ii, 22. भिचप्पई C D, ii, 5. भिषफई C D, ii, 5. • भिचाई CD, ii, 5. भिक्खा iii, 14.36. भिज्जत ii, 25. भुषणं B C D, iii, 35. भचप्पOD, ii, B. भषपार OD, ii, B. भुषसई C D, ii, 5. [भुषा ii, 19.] भन [ii, B.] BOD, iii,27. भेii, 26. 27. C, ii, 27. C D, ii, 26. 27. HTC D, 1, 1. म। [म₹C D, ii, 278.] माi, 3. में CD,i,268. (instr.sg.) i, 27. मरi,27. मरतोi, 28. में (gen. sg.) BCD, i,3:CD,ii, 13. मम B C D, i, 3. C D. iii, 39 ममत,[23.] 30.[ii,6.] महत, 30. मयि B C D, i,3. मर B, iii, 34.CD, i,310. मति ii, 17. मरो B, iii, 34. मउणं C D, ii, 9. मऊरो [ii, 1.] B, iii, 34. मयो B, iii, 34. C D, iii, 34. मरण B, iii, मरण C D, iii, 11. [34. मच्छरो iii, 4. मउभंत, 23. मंजरो ii, 15. मंटलं C D, iii, 11. मण C D, ii, 20. [मकिस्सा i,21.] मणुस्मा CD, i, 26°. [माणुस्मा i, 21] मतनो C D, iii, 11". मन C D, ii, 20. मना i, 1. [C D,i, 1. (declined)] मथुर C D, iii, 11. सदुवौ C D, iii, 30. मंदाल• C D, iii, 39. मधुरा iii, 11. मनुस्मा (nom. pl.) i, 21. मनुस्से (acc. pl.) महवि C,i, 110. [i, 22. मसानं iii, 23. मर (मख) ii, 1. मरति Ci, 11. महयो iii, 13. मड़i, 3. मऊi, 3. महणा [i, 3.] C D.i, 64. महर्षित, 3. महणं C D, i, 5. महर CD,i, 5.

·INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. . [मा C D, ii, 278.] रिपु i, 3. [रिi, 3.] रिपुषित, 3. रिजर्व मा C D, ii, 20. B, iii,34. माणतो C D, ii, 20. रिसहो C D, ii, 5. [माशु C D, ii, 278.] बक्लो iii, 22. माया B C D, iii, 35. बझC D, iii, 16. माता (nom. pl.)i, 10. मालाचोi, 10. मा.रूपं , 13. 17. रूपे (nom. sg.) ii, 10. लाउi, 10. मालासु i, 3. [मालासु i, 3.] मालिंगो C D, iii, 12. मिव C D, ii, 271 लक्षणो iii, G. मुक्सो iii, 9. लक्खसा iii, 38. मझते iii, 1. लच्छौ iii, 6. 36. लद्विधा CD, iii, 178 मुणिस्म , 13. भूपिणे (gen. sg.) i, 13. लट्ठी C D, iii, 17". मुणिणे (acc. pl.) i, 12. लहर C D, ii, 271. सविण C D, ii, 271. मणेर C D, ii, 27 लहश० C D, iii, 39. [मुत्तं iii. 8.] लचC D, ii, 24 लड़यो C D, iii, 30, • मुझं C D, ii, 24. ल्हाम (हर्षित) i, 1. मुहं ii, 22. iii, [11.] 13. B C D, ii, 4. लाजिद• CD, iii, 39. मुहं C D, iii, 21. लिज्जति (लोयं) ii, 21. [मूलवमा C D, ii, 14.] लोधस्स B C D, iii,35. लाए C D, i, 5. मेखो C D, iii, 111. मे C D, iii, 39. मेहो iii, 13. व ii, 22 CD, ii, 27. मोरो ii, 1. [वर (2) ii, 7.] मोड CD, ii, 271. पति (नि) B C D, ii, ro. य। बरं (वर), 7. [वर (वयं) iii, 30.] [य (च) ii, 21. C D, ii, 14.] वकलो (व्याघ्रः) C D, iii, 11'. •यर० (कर ray) C D, i, 1. [वक्लो (:) iii, 4.] 'यरा (करा maker) C D, ii, 130. [वग्गा iii, 3.] • बम्गे D, iii, 10. वग्यो iii, 21. र C D, ii, 270 • iii,4. रएश B iii,34. बज्ज (व्रज) C D, i, 1. रक्षतु i,3. रक्खंतु i, 4. रक्वज B C D, i, 3. | बम (वचं) iii, 9. र iii, 3. [वजरो ii, 15.] [रडी C D, ii, 278.] वो iii, 20. रतणं iii, 30. वंझा iii, 16. राई iii,34. बंटक मु C D, i, 1. राधा C D, iii, 110. बहमाशो C D, iii, 16. राण C D, iii, 19. बसराई [iii, 34.] B, iii, 34. वरार• B रिvi,5. iii, " .

·०२ INDEX OF PRA'KRIT WORDS. वर iii, 37. वकराया B C D, iii, 35. [विंजणाई C D, ii, 14] [.वा C D, ii, 14. विमा iii, 16. वतो CD, ii, 20. विज्जो, 4. वतं iii, 9. विउभने iii, 11. •वंदितो ii, 1. वंदितु ii, 10. बंदिता ii, | विट्टो C D, iii, 12. विकी C D, iii, 12. 19. बंदिओ ii, 19. वंदवि [ii, 19.] C D, विदो (ड) C D, i, 269. ii, 19. वंदेप्पिस C D, ii, 19. विहं (विषु) iii, 5. बड़माना iii, 26. विष्ययोयो B, iii, 34.विपजाओ CD, iii. 34. वन्हि iii, 23. विन्भमा iii, 9. वंभो ii, 10. वंभणा ii, 12. 15. भणे (acc. विन्मलो iii, 1. pl.) i, 15. विय ii, 22. विध C D, ii, 271. [वंभा iii, 3.] विज iii,2. बन्दा iii, 3. विव ii, 22. C D, ii, 271. धम्मथो iii, 3. 21. विसलेसो iii, 30. वयं i, 3. विहत्यौ C D, iii, 12. ०वणे C D,i, 1. विहप्पई C D, ii, 5. विहफई C D, ii, 5. ०वरा C D, ii, 13. विहस्सई C D, ii, 5. । परिसं iii, 30. विहाणु C D, ii, 278. बलमुई C D, iii, 21. विहन B C D, ii, 4. यश. C D, iii, 39. बौलजिणे [ii, 10.] CD, iii, 39. अमही C D, iii, 12. वौसा iii, 32. C D, ii, 15. B C D, ii, 4. वसहो iii, 13. C D, ii, 5. [वौसय i, 6.] वरप्पई CD, ii, 5: बुच्छे iii, 12. बुच्छ B C D, ii, 4. वरफर CD, ii,5. वुड्डो ii, 5. iii, 26. C D, iii, 16. REC D, ii, 5. वुहप्पई C D, ii, 5. बहिनी C D, iii, 20. बुहफाई D, ii, 5. यह (वधू) i, 3. ii, 10. बहर i, 9. बुहम्मई C D, ii, 5. वाजलो B, iii,34. वे CD, i, 10. विचि CD, i, 10. लि. वायो B, iii, 344. वारण B, iii, 34. D, i, 7. [हि CD, i, 7. बेCि D,i, वाम्रो iii, 37. 7.] वेडितो C D, i, 3. वेप C D, i, 6. वारं iii, 7. वसुं. C D, i, 3. वेसु C D,i. 3. [धारिचा CiD, ii, 278.] देंट ii, 5. वाहिज्जत iii, 25. बेनड्रो ii, 6. वि [ii, 6. 19. D, ii, 10. C D, i, 1. C D, बेदुलियो iii, 22. 30. [विii, 19.] [ii, 139. [.वेप्पिणु ii, 19.] विचलिद० C D, iii, 39. बेम्मि ii. 3. C D, ii, 6. B C D, ii, 4. विचारतो C D, ii, 20. वैरं ii, 6. विशिनी, 21, बेरिवम्गे D, ii, 1. विंचुयो ii, 15. धेसवणणे iii, 29. ~ ·INDEX OF PRA KRIT WORDS. . . वो B C Di, 3. सयं iii, 2. बोसरर CD, iii, 176. [सरा CD, ii,14.]] बोमरामि C D, iii, 17. सरि C D, ii, 5. खi, 22. C D, ii, 271. मरितासं i, 5. ii, 11. मरिता, 5. सरिस्तो CD, ii, 5. सरियसो CD, ii, 5. शयल C D, iii, 39. सरिसपो iii, 30. शिस.C D, iii, 39. सरिमो C D, ii, 5. साल CD, iii, 39. समं iii, 2. शेभे iii, 39. सबरो CD, iii, 16 मवहो C D, iii, 32 स (nom. sg.) ii, 1. 10. 17. मा ii, 1. सो संबकरो iii, 4. C D, i, 26". से (gen.)i, 17. सब.CD, i, 5. [सव्ये (nom. pl.) ii, 19.] सणो B, iii, 34. समि C D, ii, 24. सउरो i, 9. मखम C D, iii, G. सउC D, ii, 9. ससी iii, 18. सकतं ii, 15. सम iii, 2. B C D, iii, 27. सकारो CD, ii, 15. महापां C D,i, 5. सकौसाणा ii, 1. संहड CD, ii, 29". सको iii, 5. B C D, iii, 21. संहणणं C D, ii, 29". 22. सायर ii, 22. सम्गं iii, 2. 9. B C D, iii, 27. [सारया B C D, iii, 85.] संगिपहर B C D, ii, 4. सायो C D, iii, 3t. मंगो ii, 15. माहितं ii, 25. माहिज्जमान A, ii, 25. मंघडणं C D, ii, 294. साहिय्यं A, ii, 25. सचं iii, 27. मि (मि) ii, 18. सजिज्जर CD, i, 1. सिचं [B, iii, 34. C D, iii, 34. सउभो iii, 26. सिधागो C D, iii, 30. •संठो CD, iii, 11. सिन्धो ii, 3. iii, 9. सत्तबीसा [C D, ii, 14.] मत्तबोस C D, i, 1. सि iii, 5. सिडेहिता, 8. सिसाणं C D, i, 5. सत्तो iii, 3. सिग्मा iii, 2. सदो CD,i, 1. मिमिण C D, iii, 150 सडालो C D, ii, 20. सिया CD, iii, 30. सय्यो iii, 9. B C D, iii, 27. सिरे CD,i, 6. मिरे , 11. सिरा सम्भावं iii, 3. CD, ii, 11. समर OD, ii, 130. सिरी CD, iii, 30. समरो CD, iii, 15% सिविण C D, iii, 154. समिई ii, 15. सिहाi, 18. सभOD, ii, 11. सौरi, 25. 30. 10 संखो ii, सा iii, 9.

·INDEX OF PRA KRIT WORDS, . सौ , 11. iii, 18. सौमो iii, 29. ससस ii, 22. हर ii, 4. सोवय ii, 8. हर B, iii, 84. सोमोi, 1. हुई B, iii, 84. सोमस iii, 21. सुकुलम CD, iii,34. [सो ii, 8.]] सुक्खं iii, b. 26. सोईने C D, ii, 12. तुज्जो , 8. iii, 9. 15. सोषिलो OD,i 20. सो C D, iii, 3. सोहा i, 13. हुणु C D, ii, 26. सुधा ii, 19. सुम्मर C D, सौचरि D, ii, 14. i, 1. तुतं iii, 2.9. सुदं C D, ii, 398. हुपं0 D, iii, 394. सोमव्वं iii, 2. CD, i, 260. तर. ii, 21. हOD,i, 264. तुझं B C D, iii, 27. हङ्कारो D, ii, 14. सुवर्ण iii, 9. हणुमत्तो C D, ii, 20. • सुबे () C D, iii, 30. हणुमा C D, ii, 20. सुवे (खे) D, iii, 30. हत्या ii, 12. EBCD, i, 3. ETCD, i, 1. [परिणाi, 3.] सुहयोi, 24. हवति iii, 39. होति iii, 31. होर C D, i, [सहम ii, 30.] 1. C D, ii, 278. हवेर CD, ii, 24. सुकर्म iii, 30. हंगे iii, 39. रियो iii, 30. 36. हस्सो iii, 9. सूरोi, 1.24. 28. 29. ii, 18. C D, ii, 26. [हिज्जर iii, 11.] सूराi, 21. C D, i, 26°. हितो ii, 1. सेंध i, 6. हिरौ C D, iii, 30. सेहा i,21. रेडिशो CD, ii, 20. . . " CORRIGENDA ET ADDENDA. Page 14, line 1, read बुद्धि for 6, वहि वन्ही 41, 8, 47, 1, शिक्ष शिव On page 9 in footnote (२९) insert: B मनुस्मा, and on page b8, in footnote (e) insert: C D prefix देवात् देवा, and in footnote (e) insert : C D prefix देवे देवमि। " " " "

·No text on this page.

·No text on this page.